JP2022168220A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.

SOLUTION: A winning/losing lottery of a jackpot or the like is executed based on entry of game balls into operation ball entry parts 62, 63 provided in a game area PE. When a predetermined jackpot results by the lottery, a pattern corresponding to a predetermined jackpot result is established and displayed on an operation hole display part attached to a game board 60 before shifting to a second normal game state in which a support mode by an electric accessory attached to the right-side operation ball entry part 63 becomes a high-frequency support mode and a lottery mode for holding a winning/losing lottery becomes a high-probability mode, and the number of time-shortening times is set as the number of continuation times of the high-frequency support mode. When the number of time-shortening times is consumed in the second normal game state, a shift is performed to a third normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode and a high-probability mode more advantageous to a player than the second normal game state. A variation display period of a pattern on the operation hole display part is reduced by a shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a game board on which a game area is formed and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP-A-2002-78904

In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention paid to the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing attention to games.

The present invention
a game board on which a game area is formed;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry section provided in the game area;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
a pattern display means having a display portion and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one game cycle, and the pattern is displayed in a variable manner in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game turn control means for controlling the display means;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. a special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state advantageous to
As the normal game state, a first normal game state, a second normal game state more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state A game state is provided,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state a first transfer means for transferring;
A second transition means for directly transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state,
The game round control means has variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern,
The variable display period setting means has a period shortening means for shortening the variable display period of the patterns in the third normal game state to a period shorter than the variable display period of the patterns in the second normal game state. .

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. (a) A front view showing the configuration of a game board, (b) a front view of a main display unit. It is a front view of an upper variable winning device. It is a front view of a ball entering unit. (a) A front perspective view of a right-side working ball part, (b) a schematic diagram showing a passage structure relating to the right-side working ball part. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between passage length and required passage time; 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the success/failure table for lower working openings. It is the schematic which shows the right/wrong table for right operation openings. (a) Schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a lower working port, (b) Schematic diagram showing a distribution table for a right working port. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flow chart showing control processing for a lower opening. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lower working port fluctuation start process; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing control processing for a right operating port; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation start processing for the right operating opening; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing first opening/closing processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second opening/closing processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram comparing variable display time and fixed display time for each support mode; 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display time setting process for the lower opening. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display time setting process for right operation openings. It is a schematic diagram showing the difference between the variable display time and the fixed display time for each game state. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the number of times the high-frequency support mode continues. It is a block diagram showing the relationship of each game state. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball during the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball during the third normal game state. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball during the third normal game state. It is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease of possession balls accompanying the progress of the game. (a) A timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal game state, (b) A timing chart showing the flow of the game in the third normal game state. It is a timing chart showing a change in the number of pieces of pending information as the game progresses. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game at the time of transition to the second normal game state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game at the time of transition to the second normal game state. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a right-hand actuation ball. (a) A timing chart showing a display mode of a through-gate display section in a low-frequency support mode, (b) a timing chart showing a display mode of a through-gate display section in a high-frequency support mode.

An embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2, the configuration inside the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11 .

The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting plate materials on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with the outer frame 11 on the island facilities of the game hall.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 17 is fixed to a connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is constituted by these upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18, and the main part 12 of the game machine rotates to the outer frame 11 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. , and can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the leading end of the rotation (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the main part 12 of the game machine includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. a unit 15; In addition, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view ( See Figure 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. there is A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23 . A partition portion is formed in the glass holder to partition the holding area of the glass panel 23 in the front and rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the glass panels 23 doubly cover the game area PE from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20 . Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to face each glass panel in the front and rear with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, along the periphery of the window portion 21, an annular decorative portion 26 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. The annular illumination portion 26 lights up or flashes according to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. Further, an error display lamp part 27 is provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 at the center of the annular illumination part 26 and lights up when a predetermined error occurs. A ball ramp portion 28 is provided. In addition, speaker units 29 are provided at positions close to the left and right winning ball lamp units 28 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31 , and a lower plate 34 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 . The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, aligning them in a line, and guiding them to the side of a game ball launching mechanism described later. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 .

A game ball shooting handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower swelling portion 32 so as to protrude forward. By operating the game ball shooting handle 41, a game ball is shot from a game ball shooting mechanism which will be described later.

A passage forming unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 45 is molded of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage leading to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage leading to the lower tray 34 . In the passage forming unit 45, a receptacle projecting rearward and open upward is formed at an upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the receptacle is divided into left and right by a partition wall to form the entrance of the front door side upper tray passage. A section and an entrance section of the front door side lower tray passage are partitioned. A game ball entering the front door side upper tray passage is guided to the upper tray 33, and a game ball entering the front door side lower tray passage is guided to the lower tray 34.例文帳に追加

Projection shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rear surface of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13 . Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hook fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the front end side of the rotation on the back surface of the front door frame 14 . These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13 .

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11 . The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11 . The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11 , and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50 . A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and lower end of the resin base 50 on the front side of the rotation proximal end. Axial holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 into the axial holes. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting hook fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front surface of the resin base 50 on the front end side of the rotation. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by engaging the hook fitting 49 with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 also has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13 . By hooking these inner frame hook members 57 on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 , the main part 12 of the game machine is locked with respect to the outer frame 11 in a closed state.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50 . The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured to unlock the inner frame 13 from the outer frame 11 when the key is turned to the left.

A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 50 , and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50 . The game board 60 comprises a wooden plywood board and a sheet member covering the front surface of the plywood board. A game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed on the exposed portion, ie, the front surface of the game board 60 . The game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (especially various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60. FIG.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 61, operating ball entering portions 62, 63, variable prize winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like. When a ball enters the general winning port 61, the operating ball entering sections 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, etc., it is detected by a detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are awarded based on the detection result. A privilege such as the payout of balls is given to the player.

Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning hole 61, 10 game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower operating ball part 62, 4 balls are put out. A game ball is put out, and when a ball is entered into the right-side operating ball entering portion 63, one game ball is put out, and when a ball is entered into the upper variable winning device 64. 14 game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower variable winning device 65, 10 game balls are put out.

An out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that do not enter various ball entry portions are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. - 特許庁Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening portion, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening portion, but also the game ball passing through the opening portion. A mode in which it is not discharged later from the game area PE is also included. In the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out hole 68, the general winning hole 61, the operating ball entering parts 62 and 63, the variable winning devices 64 and 65, and the ball entering the through gate 66 is also expressed as a prize.

The game board 60 is also provided with a large number of nails 69 for properly distributing and adjusting the flow paths of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. Various configurations such as the nail 69 and the windmill divide the flow path of the game ball, and are adjusted so that the winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 or the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operating ball entering sections 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. As shown in FIG. The operating ball-in sections 62 and 63 are divided into a lower-side operating ball-in section 62 arranged below the variable display unit 67 and a right-side operating ball-in section 63 arranged on the right side of the variable display unit 67. In particular, the right side operation ball entry portion 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 as an opening/closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 71 has a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit for driving the shutter. By changing the position of the shutter by the drive unit, the right operation entrance ball 63 (right operation opening 63a) It is possible to switch between an open state (acceptance state) in which a ball can be entered into the ball and a closed state (non-acceptance state) in which the same ball cannot be entered. It should be noted that the electric accessory 71 attached to the right actuating ball entry portion 63 may be switchable between a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the right actuating opening 63a and a state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball.

The above-mentioned through gate 66 is arranged at a position upstream of the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 in the game area PE (right route, which will be described in detail later), more specifically, at a position on the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67. there is A game ball can pass through the through gate 66 in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has entered the through gate 66 is not discharged from the game area PE and flows downstream in the game area PE. there is When the lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 66 is won, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

The upper variable winning device 64 is arranged at a position between the through gate 66 and the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 on the right route. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with an upper large winning opening into which a plurality of game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the upper large winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the big winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (assisted state or accepting state) in which entry of game balls is possible or facilitated, and a closed state (unassisted state or non-accepting state) in which entry of game balls is impossible or difficult. It's becoming In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and normally the shutter is kept closed, and in the internal lottery, the opening and closing execution mode (special game state or opening and closing execution state). is switched to the open state when the transition result is as follows.

The lower variable prize winning device 65 is arranged at a position downstream of the right operating ball entry portion 63 on the right route. The lower variable prize winning device 65 is formed with a lower special prize winning opening into which a plurality of game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower special prize winning opening. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the big winning opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (receiving state) in which a game ball can enter and a closed state (non-receiving state) in which the game ball cannot enter. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and normally the shutter is kept closed, and in the internal lottery, the opening and closing execution mode (special game state or opening and closing execution state). is switched to the open state when the transition result is as follows.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win or a special win occurs. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 65 in the opening/closing execution mode, for example, when a predetermined period of time (30 sec or 0.8 sec in this embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number of winnings (9 in this embodiment) The number of rounds is set so that the shutter is opened with a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 6, 8 and 16 rounds in this embodiment) as the upper limit.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be explained. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (variably displays) symbols triggered by the winning of the operative ball entry portions 62 and 63 .

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents on the display screen 75a are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. On the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, for example, patterns are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right, and these patterns are scrolled in the vertical direction so as to be variably displayed. When a big win or a special win is achieved, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line, and the opening/closing execution mode is entered. The pattern display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment type display device.

A center frame 76 is arranged in the variable display unit 67 so as to surround the pattern display device 75 . The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in this fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 stand upright from the front of the game board 60. It is configured so that the clearance dimension between and is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the pattern display device 75, and the flowing path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). It is roughly divided into the above right route detouring from the left side and the left route detouring from the left side.

In addition, the above-described right-side operation ball entry portion 63, variable winning devices 64 and 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and for game balls flowing down the left route, the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 and variable winning are arranged. Winning to devices 64, 65 and through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entering portion 62 is arranged on the left route, and the game ball flowing down the right route is avoided from entering the lower operating ball entering portion 62. - 特許庁The player can advance the game advantageously by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (flowing path of the game ball) from the right route/left route according to the game situation.

A main display unit 81 is arranged on a protective member for the guide rail 100 arranged outside the game area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically, the glass panel 23 on the rear side) that allows the game area PE to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. A main display portion D is provided on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the content displayed on the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display portion D includes a lower operation entrance display portion DL for displaying the lottery result based on the winning to the lower operation entrance portion 62 (lower operation entrance 62a), and a right operation entrance portion 63 (right operation entrance 63a). ) for displaying the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the right operation opening DR.

In the lower working opening display section DL, the variable display of the pattern is performed by triggering the winning of the lower working opening 62 (lower working opening 62a), and as a result of stopping the variable display, the lower working opening opening is displayed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of 62 is clearly indicated. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the lower operation entrance portion 62 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the display portion DL for the lower operation opening stops the variable display, After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result of the stoppage, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the display portion DR for the right operation opening, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the right operation entrance portion 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the right operation entrance portion 63 (right operation opening 63a) is displayed. The results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning prize will be clearly indicated. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is a winning result corresponding to a big win or a special win, the fluctuation display is stopped in the right-side operating hole display portion DR, and the stop result is After the predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any one of the operation entrance portions 62, 63, the corresponding operation port display portions DL, DR start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. The time until the game is played corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the game cycle is continued until the variable display is stopped while a predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

A main display portion D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a reserved number display portion SL for the lower operating port and a reserved number display portion SR for the right operating port. The reserved number display section SL for the lower working opening corresponds to the lower working opening 62a, and the number of times the game ball has entered the lower working opening 62a is reserved up to four times. The pending number is displayed. The reserved number display part SR for the right working opening corresponds to the right working opening 63a, and the number of times the game ball has entered the right working opening 63a is reserved up to four times, and the reserved number display part SR for the right working opening is lit. The number of holds is displayed by .

The main display portion of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through-gate display portion DS for displaying a lottery result based on the winning of the through-gate 66 in addition to the various display portions described above. In the through-gate display unit DS, the winning of the through-gate 66 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 66 is displayed. clarified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 66 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric power open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display part DS and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 71 attached to the right actuating entrance ball portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 66 is retained up to four times, and the main display portion D of the main display unit 81 displays the retained number. A holding number display section SS for a through gate is provided.

Referring again to FIG. 2, the structure of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the area where the game board 60 is mounted on the resin base 50, a game ball is projected toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball shooting handle 41. A game ball shooting mechanism 110 for shooting is provided. The game ball shooting mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 for shooting a game ball placed at a predetermined shooting standby position, a shooting rail 112 for defining the shooting direction of the game ball shot by the solenoid 111, and a game ball at the shooting standby position. A ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components. integrated with respect to.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an oblique state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper is arranged to stop the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the launch standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

Solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. By reciprocating the output shaft of the solenoid 111 in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply/shooting control device, the game ball placed at the shooting standby position moves to the game board 60 side, specifically the game It is driven out toward the guide rail 100 attached to the board 60 .

The guide rail 100 divides the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion opened to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. A game ball shot based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the shooting rail 112→the guide rail 100 (entrance part→exit part). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball shooting handle 41, it is possible to separate the hitting of the game balls into the area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and the area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the same game area PE. It is possible.

In the game board 60, on the front side of the exit portion, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning into the guide passage 103. This prevents the game ball that reaches the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the following game ball.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other obliquely across the lower edge of the game board 60 . In other words, both rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are laterally shifted near the lower edge of the game board 60 . As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board 60, and a gap of a predetermined distance is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.例文帳に追加

A foul ball passage 46 is arranged below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 . If the game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the clearance. becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the front door side lower tray passage, and the game ball entering the foul ball passage 46 is discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) to pass through the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction. 121 are provided. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage and a main body side lower plate passage. The upstream side of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicates with a game ball distribution section which will be described later. Further, below the passage forming member 121, the socket portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted, and below the main body side upper tray passage, the front door side upper tray passage is arranged, A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage.

Below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50, an opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage is attached. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction. is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure to close the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling can be prevented. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the open/close member 124 is pushed open by the receptacle provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

Bearing metal fittings 132 are vertically arranged side by side on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50 . Bearing portions are formed in the bearing fitting 132 so as to be spaced apart vertically, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification/effect control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification/effect control device unit 142 includes a notification/effect control device 143 and a mounting base 144 , and the notification/effect control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144 .

The notification/effect control device 143 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls the voice, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 145 made of the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the back surface of the game board 60 . The gathering board 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes, a detection mechanism for detecting entry of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

To explain the game ball recovery mechanism, the assembly plate 150 is provided with recovery passages individually corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general prize winning port 61 . These recovery passages descend along the back surface of the game board 60 from the ball-entering portions, and define the falling path of the game balls. Each recovery path joins near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the ball entry part such as the general prize winning port 61 gather at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery path. becomes. An exit portion of each collection passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided on the tip side thereof (more specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered under the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Incidentally, the out port 68 is similarly connected to the discharge passage, and game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

Describing the detection mechanism, the collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors corresponding to various ball entry portions such as the general prize winning port 61 and the like. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage connected to the ball entry portion such as the general prize winning port 61, and the game ball is dropped in a state where the falling path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a game ball entering a ball entrance such as the general prize winning opening 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage. Specifically, a magnetic sensor is used to detect changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. It is configured to be output as The main controller unit 160 and its accompanying configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly plate 150 from the rear side, and is operated by a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main control device 162 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 163 made of the like.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the board box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner. It is designed to be inseparably joined. The sealing process by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening should occur, such a situation can be detected early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pawl into at least one long hole of the plurality of sealing portions. When the circuit board box 163 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the main control circuit board housed therein, or when the main control circuit board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pawl is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of the opening of the circuit board box 163 is left in the circuit board box 163, it can be easily found that the circuit board box 163 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connecting pieces formed on the mounting table 161, and sealing processing is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting table 161 by the connecting pieces and the connecting pieces. will be

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered with a back pack unit 15 from behind. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 to which a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. and The protective cover part 212 has a shape in which left and right sides and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67 .

An external terminal plate 213 is provided on the upper right portion of the base portion 211 . Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 213, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Also, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins at the right end portion as seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking pins are inserted into the bearing fittings 132 (specifically, the bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. The rear pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, a fastener for fastening to a hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the tip of the rotation of the base portion 211, and the fastener is fitted into the hole to be fastened. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 .

A payout mechanism part 202 is arranged on the base part 211 so as to bypass the protective cover part 212 . The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged on the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. be. A tank rail gently sloping downstream is connected to the lower portion of the tank 221, and a vertically extending case rail is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222 .

The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper tray 33 via the upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and control device aggregate unit 204 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear direction. The discharge passage board 203 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls drawn out from the collection passage or the like to the discharge passage pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Ejected.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply/launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispenser 222, pressing the state recovery switch will clear the ball clogging.

The power supply/emission control device 191 has a power supply/emission control board housed in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is controlled. Also, the power/fire control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. The pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure is retained, and upon recovery from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be restored. It's becoming Therefore, if the power is cut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the cutoff is stored, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data will be initialized. It has become.

The present embodiment is characterized by the configuration of the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 and the variable prize-winning devices 64 and 65 arranged on the right route. A supplementary description of these ball entry portions will be given below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. 5 is a front view of the upper variable winning device 64, FIG. 6 is a front view of the ball entry unit, FIG. 7(a) is a perspective view of the right-side operation ball entry part 63 seen from the front side, and FIG. 7(b) is the right side. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure in the operating ball entry portion 63, and FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the passage length and the required passage time.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
The upper variable winning device 64 has a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which game balls pass is formed. It is attached to the game board 60 . The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 312 can be visually recognized through the outer shell portion of the housing 310 .

A portion of the housing 310 that bulges out toward the front side of the game board 60 is formed with an upper big prize winning port 311 constituting an entrance portion of a ball passage 312 . The upper large prize winning port 311 faces the midstream portion (vertically extending portion) of the right route from the side (right side) of the gaming machine, and the upper large prize winning port 311 is used for the game balls on the right route. A shutter 315 is arranged so as to cover from the downstream side (right side).

The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60, and is rotated around the pivot point to close and block the inflow of game balls into the upper prize winning opening 311. It is configured to be displaced between the position and the open position that allows the inflow of game balls to the upper big winning opening 311 .

A drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on drive signals from the main controller 162 . The shutter 315 is configured to stand by at the closed position when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excitation state).

When the shutter 315 is placed at the open position (open state), about half of the flow-down area (flow path) in the midstream portion of the right route is cut off by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route are It is configured to flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312 ) through the upper big winning opening 311 .

The ball passage 312 is branched into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate position. A channel switching member 316 capable of switching the destination of the game ball between the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 314 is arranged in this branch portion. A drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162 . The flow path switching member 316 is configured to stand by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 312 in a state (non-excited state) in which no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 .

In a state where the flow path switching member 316 is arranged at the projecting position, the flow path switching member 316 blocks the inlet portion of the second branch passage 314 . In this state, the game balls that have reached the branched portion are prevented from flowing into the second branched passage 314 , and the game balls flow into the first branched passage 313 .

When the main controller 162 outputs a driving unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316 , the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position where the projection into the ball passage 312 is avoided, and the second branch passage 314 is closed. The entrance is opened. Thereby, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, game balls that have reached the branching portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313 , and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 314 .

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is defined in advance according to the type of the jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result, which will be described later, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 It is prescribed to return to the projecting position immediately after that. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the projecting position is shorter than the required time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper special winning opening 311 to reach the branch portion. For this reason, inflow into the second branch passage 314 is substantially avoided when a normal jackpot results.

On the other hand, in the case of a probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but the shutter 315 is closed thereafter. It is prescribed to wait in the projecting position until it returns to the position. Therefore, most of the game balls that have flowed into the upper big winning opening 311 flow into the second branch passage 314 when the probability variable jackpot results.

An upstream detection sensor 317 is disposed in a portion of the ball passage 312 upstream of the branched portion, and the portion of the ball passage 312 downstream of the branched portion, specifically, the first branched passage 313 and the second branched passage 313 . Downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are arranged in the branch passage 314 . The upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main controller 162, and the main controller 162 operates the upper variable winning device 64 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317. The presence or absence of winning a prize is specified, and a predetermined number of game balls are put out when a winning occurs. In addition, based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318 and 319, the state of remaining game balls is monitored.

In the main controller 162 shown in the present embodiment, based on the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313, the ball entering the second branch passage 314 is detected during the opening/closing execution mode. When it is specified that has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Although the details will be described later, in the high-probability mode, the probability of winning a big win is higher than in the low-probability mode, and the player can proceed with the game advantageously. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as an “advantageous ball entry portion 314”.

Of the game balls launched to the right route, most of the game balls that pass through the upper variable prize winning device 64 go to the ball entering unit 70 arranged downstream of the upper variable prize winning device 64 on the right route. Become. The ball entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the above-described right-side operation ball entry part 63 and the lower variable prize winning device 65 . The ball-entering unit 70 will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Entering ball unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 forming part of the right route (specifically, the downstream area) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. It is fixed to the game board 60 in this state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). An inlet portion 321a of the ball entering unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the upper right portion of the bulging portion of the housing 320 so as to face upward, and an outlet portion of the ball entering unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the lower left portion. 321b is formed to face left.

The outlet portion 321b is positioned directly below the lower operating ball entering portion 62, and the game ball flowing out from the outlet portion 321b is guided below the lower operating ball entering portion 62. This prevents the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 from entering the lower operating ball entry portion 62 .

The housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, game balls flowing down the ball passage 321) can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity between the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque so that the internal structure may be difficult or impossible to see.

The ball passage 321 has a passage width, a passage height, etc., defined so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is generated at a midway position in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 includes an upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and a laterally long upstream passage portion 322 that slopes downward toward the center of the game machine, and a downstream portion of the ball passage 321 that forms the game machine. A laterally long downstream passage portion 324 that slopes down toward the center is provided so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side so that there is a height difference, and the upstream passage portions are shifted vertically and horizontally. 322 and a downstream passage portion 324 are connected by an intermediate passage portion 323 (corresponding to a "communication passage portion") extending in the vertical direction.

The right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is provided along with the upstream passage portion 322 . Specifically, the right working port 63a of the right working entrance ball portion 63 is open upward, and the upstream passage portion 322 is formed across the top of the right working port 63a. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 includes a shutter 331 that can slide back and forth (thickness direction of the game board 60), and an electric accessory driving portion 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331. have The electric accessory driving section 332 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162 . In a non-driving state (non-exciting state) in which no drive signal is output from the main controller 162, the shutter 331 is arranged at the closed position covering the right operation opening 63a from above, and a drive signal is output to drive the electric accessory. When the portion 332 is driven (excited), it moves (retreats) to the open position where the right operation opening 63a is not covered.

Here, when the shutter 331 is arranged at the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom of the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the housing 320 has an upstream bottom portion 322a forming a bottom portion on the upstream side of the right working port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322, and a right working port 63a. A downstream side bottom portion 322b forming a downstream side bottom portion is provided, and the upstream side bottom portion 322a, the downstream side bottom portion 322b, and the shutter 331 form a rolling surface for the game ball. In the following description, the region in which the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322, that is, the region in which the upstream passage portion 322 faces the right operation port 63a with the shutter 331 interposed therebetween is referred to as the "second 1 specific region SE1” (see FIG. 6).

The game ball that has reached the first specific area SE1 under the condition that the shutter 331 is arranged at the open position and the upstream side passage portion 322 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is the passage direction of the upstream side passage portion 322. becomes difficult to move to, and flows into the right operating port 63a.

In the present embodiment, the first specific area SE1 is devised to slow down the game ball passing through the first specific area SE1 to increase the chance of winning a prize to the right operation opening 63a. The device will be described below with reference to FIG. 7(b). In addition, in FIG. 6(b), the path (flow path) through which the game ball passes is illustrated using a dashed line.

A front wall portion 335 and a rear wall portion 336 that define the passage of the upstream passage portion 322 in the housing 320 are provided with protrusions 335a and 336a that protrude toward the first specific region SE1. . The ridges 335 a and 336 a extend vertically perpendicular to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322 . In the following description, the ridge portion 335a provided on the front wall portion 335 will be referred to as the "front ridge portion 335a", and the ridge portion 336a provided on the rear wall portion 336 will be referred to as the "rear ridge portion 336a". ”.

The clearance dimension D1 between the rear wall portion 336 and the front side projection portion 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the clearance dimension D2 between the front wall portion 335 and the rear side projection portion 336a is also set. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) are arranged with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball in the passage direction (guiding direction) of the upstream passage portion 322 for the front protrusion portion 335a. A plurality of (two in the present embodiment) are arranged with a gap larger than the diameter D of the game ball in the passage direction (guiding direction) of the upstream passage portion 322 for the side ridges 336a. By alternately arranging the front ridges 335a and the rear ridges 336a, the flow path of the game ball is designed to meander back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

Here, when the amount of projection of the front side ridge portion 335a, the amount of projection of the rear side ridge portion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball are added, the passage width of the upstream side passage portion 322 is larger than the width of the game ball. (D3<D). As a result, the game ball is prevented from running through the first specific area SE1 so as to avoid collision with the protrusions 335a and 336a.

A game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 collides with the ridge portions 335a and 336a. Due to such a collision, the movement speed of the game ball in the first specific area SE1 decreases (decelerates). That is, the first specific region SE1 of the upstream passage portion 322 functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By adopting a configuration that decelerates the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 in this way, the game ball passes through the first specific region SE1 more easily than when the protrusions 335a and 336a are defective. lengthening the time required for

In addition, the protrusions 335a and 336a are arranged so as to be biased toward the intermediate passage portion 323 in the first specific region SE1. As a result, the game ball is decelerated at the position immediately upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323 .

In this embodiment, the degree of deceleration is defined as follows. That is, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is the sum (1.2 sec) of the fluctuation display time and the fixed display time of the through gate display section DS in the low frequency support mode. It is defined to be shorter than the game ball shooting cycle (0.6 sec). Although the details will be described later, if the game ball is continuously shot to the right route during the low-frequency support mode, the game ball flowing down the right route passes through the right operation ball entry part 63 and falls downward. At least one entering ball is generated in most cases when the variable winning device 65 is reached and the right side operating entering ball portion 63 is in an open state.

The game balls that have not flowed into the right operating port 63 a continue to move along the ball passage 321 , and most of them reach the downstream side passage portion 324 . Here, referring to FIG. 6 again, the downstream passage portion 324 and the associated lower variable winning device 65 will be described.

A lower special prize winning port 341 of the lower variable prize winning device 65 is open upward, and a downstream passage portion 324 is formed across the upper portion of the lower special prize winning port 341 . The lower variable winning device 65 has a shutter 345 that can slide back and forth (thickness direction of the game board 60), and a drive section (solenoid) for the shutter 345. A drive unit for the shutter 345 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on drive signals from the main controller 162 . In a non-driving state (non-exciting state) in which no driving signal is output from the main controller 162, the shutter 345 is arranged in a closed position covering the lower prize winning opening 341 from above, and a driving signal is output to the driving unit. is in a driven state (excited state), it moves (retreats) to an open position that does not cover the lower big winning opening 341 .

Here, when the shutter 345 is arranged at the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom of the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream side bottom portion forming a bottom portion on the downstream side of the lower special winning opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream side passage portion 324, and these downstream side bottom portions and the shutter 345 are formed. In the following description, the area where the flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the area facing the lower special prize opening 341 across the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324 is defined as " It is referred to as the second specific area SE2.

The game ball that has reached the second specific region SE2 under the condition that the shutter 345 is arranged at the open position and the downstream side passage portion 324 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut, moves in the passage direction of the downstream side passage portion 324. It becomes difficult to move to, and it flows into the lower grand prize winning opening 341 .

Although the second specific region SE2 is also provided with a deceleration section composed of the protrusions 375a and 376a (see FIG. 8), the specific configuration of the deceleration section is the same as that of the first specific region SE1. Therefore, the explanation is used.

The intermediate passage portion 323 described above extends upward from the upstream end of the shutter 345 . The left side passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323 is located on the extension of the upstream side passage portion 322, and the game ball passing through the upstream side passage portion 322 collides with the left side passage wall surface to face , and falls through the intermediate passage portion 323 toward the shutter 345 .

An opening through which game balls can pass is formed in the right passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage portion 323, and some of the game balls passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 flow into the opening. A discharge passage is formed between the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 for discharging the game ball that has flowed into the opening from the ball-entering unit 70 . Some of the game balls flowing down the ball passage 321 are ejected from the entering ball unit 70 through the opening→ejection passage before reaching the lower variable winning device 65 (shutter 345). In addition, since the game ball passing through this discharge passage is guided to the back side of the game board 60 as it is, movement to the out port 68 is avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the path length of each part of the ball path 321 and the time required for the game ball to pass. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the ball entering unit 70 viewed from the front. In the following description, the path length of the first specific area SE1 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is "path length PL1", the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is "required time T1", and the path length when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is The path length of the second specific area SE2 is "path length PL3", the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is "required time T3", and the distance between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is The path length is referred to as "path length PL2", and the required time required to pass between the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is referred to as "required time T3".

Comparing the path lengths PL1 to PL3, they are longer in the order of path length PL2<path length PL1<path length PL3. As already explained, the passage path of the game ball meanders in the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2. It becomes longer in order of PL3.

Although the details will be described later, the required time T1 in the first specific region SE1 is the minimum interval time (0.7 sec) when the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 is continuously opened in the low-frequency support mode. set to be longer than and shorter than the minimum interval time (1.2 sec) in the case where the right side operation ball entry portion 63 is continuously opened in the high-frequency support mode, and the required time in the second specific region SE2 T3 is set to be longer than the minimum interval time (1.7 sec) when the lower variable prize winning device 65 is continuously opened when the special winning continues.

For example, when the lower variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the game ball that avoids the right side operation ball entering portion 63 will go to the lower variable winning device 65 . By reducing the separation between the right-side operating ball-entering part 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, it gives an impression that the game ball avoiding the right-side operating ball-entering part 63 quickly goes to the lower side variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加It's getting easier. As a result, the expectation of winning a prize to the lower variable prize winning device 65 can be favorably enhanced.

(Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

A main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162 is equipped with an MPU 602 . The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. A RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. A part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604 may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 602 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 605 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 181, various detection sensors, and the like. The power supply/emission control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605 , and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605 . In addition, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the lower operation ball entry portion 62, a detection sensor 391c for the right operation ball entry portion 63, and an upper variable prize winning device 64 Detection sensors 317 to 318 for, detection sensor 391d for lower variable winning device 65, detection sensor 391e for through gate 66 are connected, and detection information from these various detection sensors 317 to 318, 391a to 391e ( Based on the detection signal), the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes determination of winning (determination of entering a ball) for each ball entering portion. Also, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot generation lottery based on winnings to the lower working ball entry portion 62 (lower working opening 62a) and the right working ball entering portion 63 (right working opening 63a).

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, the payout control device 181 and the notification/production control device 143 (more specifically, the notification/production control board 651). A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181, for example, based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when the winning to the upper special winning opening 311 is specified, 14 games are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the balls is output, and when the winning to the lower large prize winning opening 341 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and the game balls are sent to the lower operation opening 62a. When the winning is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output, and when the winning to the right operation port 63a is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. is output.

Various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the notification/production control device 143 . In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various types of information are included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 602, an electric accessory drive unit 332 that drives the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operation ball entry unit 63, a variable winning drive unit 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, and an upper A channel switching drive section 452 for driving the channel switching member 316 of the variable winning device 64, a variable winning drive section 461 for driving the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, the main display unit 81 and the like are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open/close execution mode, the variable winning driving unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 and the variable winning driving unit of the lower variable winning device 65 are controlled by the MPU 602 so that the upper and lower special winning ports 311 and 341 are opened and closed. 461 drive control is executed. Further, for example, in each game round, the MPU 602 performs display control of the lower actuation opening display portion DL and the right actuation opening display portion DR in the main display portion D of the main display unit 81 .

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602 . The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. The MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal through a jackpot signal output terminal to the management control device on the gaming hall side, for example, when the game results in a jackpot result. Specifically, normally, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot result is obtained. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The blackout monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch controller 191, and also monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch controller 191, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162 .

The power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 601, the payout control device 181, etc., generate the necessary operating power for each, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do.

The power/shooting control device 191 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 110, and the game ball shooting mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball shooting handle 41 are connected to the power/shooting control device 191 . The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) of the game ball shooting handle 41. Based on the information from this operation level detection sensor, the shooting intensity (shooting speed) of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is determined. ) will be determined. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41, and the power/shooting control device 191 detects when the player touches the game ball shooting handle 41 based on this information. It is configured to be able to grasp whether or not When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball shooting handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball shooting handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is shot. will be allowed.

Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162 , the notification/production control device 143 , and the display control device 710 via the power supply/fire control device 191 .

The notification/production control device 143 has a notification/production control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted. A RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the above, is incorporated.

The notification/production control device 143 drives and controls the lamp portions 26 to 28 and the speaker portion 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and controls the display control device 710. It is. More specifically, in the notification/production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the pattern display device 75 changes the pattern display mode and the pattern stop display mode (for example, the pattern is stopped). The type of combination) is determined, presence or absence of reach occurrence, content of reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 710 .

The display control device 710 has a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU stores various control programs and fixed value data in a ROM, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. etc., a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM storing image data, a video RAM temporarily storing image data read from the character ROM, etc. there is The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the pattern display device 75) based on the command input from the notification/effect control device 143. FIG.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 75 will be described. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are set. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

In addition, the display screen 75a is designed to stop-display one symbol for each symbol row, so that a total of three symbols are stopped-displayed. The variable display stops in the order of the right symbol row → left symbol row → middle symbol row, and when the variable display of all symbol rows is completed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed on the active line, the result of the big win or the special win is obtained. A moving image or the like showing transition to the corresponding special game state is displayed.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). row), and the middle symbol row can be called a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

By the way, the pattern display device 75 is not limited to the above-described pattern variable display mode, and is arbitrary, and includes the number of pattern rows, the direction of pattern variable display in the pattern row, the number of symbols in each pattern row, and the like. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows may be set in the horizontal direction.

A pending display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The reservation display area is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit reservation display areas as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins in the lower operation opening 62a are arranged in the left and right direction. area and the reserved number display area for the lower working opening divided and displayed so that the same number of unit reserved display areas as the maximum reserved number when the game ball wins the right working opening 63a are arranged in the horizontal direction. It is configured.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 62a, the maximum number of reservations is four, and correspondingly, in the reservation number display area for the lower operation opening, the first unit reservation display area , a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area are set. In addition, when the game ball wins the right operation opening 63a, the maximum number of reservations is 4. Correspondingly, in the reservation number display area for the right operation opening, the first unit reservation display area, the second unit A reserved display area, a third reserved display area, and a fourth reserved display area are set.

For example, when the game ball wins the lower operation opening 62a and the number of reservations is 1, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area, and the game ball enters the lower operation opening 62a. When the number of pending prizes is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area to the fourth unit pending display area.

(About various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 10, the configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During the game, the MPU 602 uses various counter information to select a transition lottery to the special game state (open/close execution mode), set the display of the main display unit 81 (main display section D), set the pattern display of the pattern display device 75, and the like. More specifically, a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a big win or a special win, a winning type counter C2 used for judging the type of a big win, and a pattern display. A reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a display for the ball entry section of the main display unit 81. A fluctuation type counter CS for determining the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the section and the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 is used. Furthermore, an open random number counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessary 71 attached to the right side operating ball entry portion 63 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604 .

The RAM 604 stores a lower working port reservation area Ra, a right working port reserving area Rb, a first execution area AE1 for the lower working port reserving area Ra, and a second execution area AE1 for the right working port reserving area Rb. A reserved ball storage area 632 consisting of an area AE2 and a total reserved ball number storage area is provided. Then, in this reserved ball storage area 632, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is time-series in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the lower operation opening 62a or the right operation opening 63a. It is designed to be stored automatically.

More specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by one within the range of, for example, "0" to "599" and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=“0” to “599”). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 62a or the right operation opening 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 62a, and the right working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the right working opening 63a. stored in

Random number values for jackpot winnings and random number values for special winnings are stored as win/fail tables (win/fail information groups) in win/fail table storage area 621 as win/fail information group storage means in ROM 603 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. As win/fail tables, a win/fail table (see FIG. 11) for the lower actuation opening 62a and a win/fail table (see FIG. 12) for the right actuation opening 63a are provided. , the success/failure table for the lower actuation opening 62a is referred to, and the success/failure table for the right actuation opening 63a is referred to in the lottery based on the ball entering the right actuation opening 63a.

(Pass/fail table for lower working port)
In the success/failure table for the lower operation port 62a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 507". That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 ranging from "0" to "599", "7" and "507" correspond to the result of the big win, and the probability of winning the big win is 2/600. The low-probability mode corresponding success/failure table for the lower operating port 62a does not include random number values corresponding to special winning results. there is

In the success/failure table for the lower operating port 62a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. The odds of winning a jackpot are 6/600. The success/failure table corresponding to the high-probability mode for the lower operating port 62a is not provided with random number values corresponding to special win results, and the random number values other than those resulting in the big win results are not matched to the lottery results. there is

(Applicability table for right operation port)
In the success/failure table for the right operation port 63a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 507". That is, "7" and "507" among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 599" correspond to the result of a big win, and the probability of winning a big win is 2/600. It is similar to the success/failure table for However, in the success/failure table for the right operating port 63a, "1", "2", "3", ..., "597", "598", "599" correspond to special winning results. The resulting probability is 593/600. In addition, except for the value of the random number that results in the big win and the value of the random number that results in the special win, in detail, the values of "4", "104", "204", "404", and "504" are the result of losing the lottery result. is configured as

In the success/failure table for the right operating port 63a, which is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. It is the same as the success/failure table for the lower operating port 62a in that the probability of winning the jackpot is 6/600. However, in the success/failure table for the right operating port 63a, "1", "2", "3", ..., "597", "598", "599" correspond to special winning results. The resulting probability is 593/600. In addition to the value of the random number that results in the big win and the random number that results in the special win, specifically, "404" is configured so that the lottery results are lost.

In this way, the probability of winning a big win is the same regardless of whether the player wins at the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. However, when the lower working opening 62a and the right working opening 63a are compared, the right working opening 63a is set to have a higher possibility of a special winning result. In other words, the right working opening 63a is given more preferential treatment than the lower working opening 62a in terms of the probability that a certain number of balls can be expected to come out.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10 again, the win type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0" to "99" and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). there is The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 62a, and the right working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the right working opening 63a. stored in

The distribution destination of the game result for the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603 . In this embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined with reference to the winning type counter C2 and the distribution table. As jackpot results, 2R normal jackpot results, 8R normal jackpot results, 2R variable jackpot results, 6R variable jackpot results A, 6R variable jackpot results B, 6R variable jackpot results C, 6R variable jackpot results D, 6R variable jackpot results E, An 8R probability variable jackpot result, a 16R probability variable jackpot result A, and a 16R probability variable jackpot result B are provided.

(Distribution table for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the distribution table for the lower opening, a total of 50 values of "0" to "49" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "99" are 8R normal jackpots. Corresponding to the result, a total of 10 from "50" to "59" correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result A, and a total of 8 from "60" to "67" correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result B. A total of 6 from "68" to "73" correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result C, and a total of 4 from "74" to "77" correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result D. A total of 2 pieces of 78” to “79” correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result E, and a total of 18 pieces of “80” to “97” correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot result A, “98” to “ 99” corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot result B.

(Distribution table for right working port)
As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the distribution table for the right operation opening, a total of 35 values of "0" to "34" among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0" to "99" are 2R normal jackpots. Corresponding to the result, a total of 5 from "35" to "39" correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a total of 10 from "40" to "49" correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A There, a total of four from “50” to “53” correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result B, and a total of three from “54” to “56” correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result C, “57 ”-“58” correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result D, “59” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result E, and “60” to “95” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot result A. Corresponding, a total of four of "96" to "99" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot result B.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10 again, the reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 62a or the right operation opening 63a. More specifically, it is stored in the lower working opening reservation area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working opening 62a, and the right working opening reservation area Rb of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the right working opening 63a. stored in Based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether or not to generate the reach display (reach state).

Here, the ready-to-win display is provided with a pattern display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and the game result is a game result corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. In a gaming machine in which a stop display result after display can be a special display result, after the start of variable display (or variable display) of patterns (pictures) on the pattern display device 75, before the stop display result is derived and displayed, This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. It is a display state in which combinations of possible ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

The contents displayed on the display screen 75a will be described in more detail. First, when the variable display of symbols in the right symbol row is finished, and then the variable display of symbols in the left symbol row is finished, the player hits one of the effective lines and the symbols are displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols to which the numbers that make up the combination are attached. displayed. When a big win occurs, the main patterns forming the reach line and the main patterns attached with the numbers forming the combination of the winning patterns are stopped and displayed on the reach line to display the patterns in the middle pattern row in a variable manner. is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. Rendering is performed, and a ready-to-win effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or hiding the combination of the ready-to-win symbols. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS determines the variation display time of the pattern in the display portion DL for the lower operation port and the display portion DR for the right operation port of the main display unit 81 (main display portion D), and the variation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 75. is used in MPU 602 to determine . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the display portion DL for the lower operation port and the display portion DR for the right operation port (at the start of variation of the pattern by the pattern display device 75). be.

The open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electrical work storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 66.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, the electric accessary 71 refers to the stored value of the open random number counter C4 and the supporting lottery table (win/fail information group) stored in the win/fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. An open lottery (support lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the to the open state. In addition, the probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (249/250 in detail) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (248/250 in detail), and high-frequency support mode is preferred.

(Various processing executed by MPU 602 of main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing which are executed in advancing the game in each game round by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , the description of these processes is omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 317 to 319 and 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that the lower operation opening 62a has won a prize, the winning detection flag for the lower operation opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and it is determined that the right operation opening 63a has won a prize. When it is determined that the winning detection flag for the right operation opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635, and when it is determined that the winning to the upper variable winning device 64 has occurred, the various flag storage area 635 is stored for the upper big winning opening. When it is determined that a prize has been won in the advantageous ball entry section 314, the winning detection flag for the advantageous ball entry section is stored in the various flag storage area 635, and the lower variable prize winning device 65 When it is determined that the winning has occurred, the winning detection flag for the lower big winning opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 .

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604 .

In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM604.

After that, in step S104, a prize-winning process for thru is executed in accordance with the winning of the through gate 66, and in subsequent step S105, after executing the prize-winning process for the working openings in accordance with the winning of the working openings 62a and 63a, this End timer interrupt processing.

(Prize processing for through)
In the winning process for through in step S104, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 66 or not. When the game ball wins the through gate 66 and the number SN of the role item reserved memory is less than the upper limit (more specifically, 4), the number SN of the character item reserved memory is incremented by 1 and updated in step S103. The value of the open random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the empty storage areas of the electrical storage area 633 of the RAM604. After that, the winning process is terminated.

When it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 66, or when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 66 but the number SN of the accessory reserved storage has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is changed. The prize winning process is terminated without storing.

In addition, in the win-win process for through, the display control process of the pending number display section SS for through gate of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, light emission control processing is executed so that the same number of light emitting bodies as the number SN of the reserved storage of the role product is turned on for the through gate holding number display section SS consisting of four light emitting bodies (LEDs).

(Winning process for working opening)
In the winning process for the operation opening, first, whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) in the lower operation ball entry portion 62 (lower operation opening 62a) is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. It is determined by whether or not the winning detection flag is stored. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that the winning to the lower operation ball entry portion 62 (lower operation opening 62a) has occurred, payout control A prize ball command is set to cause the device 181 to pay out four game balls. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side, information indicating that the game ball has entered the lower operation ball entry portion 62 (lower operation opening 62a). As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a prize has been entered into the lower working ball entry portion 62 (lower working opening 62a).

After that, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the reservation area Ra for the lower opening (starting reservation storage number) is updated (1 is added). Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process ends.

On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the lower operation opening is not stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the right operation opening is stored, the payout control device 181 A prize ball command for paying out one game ball is set. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process to be described later.

Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side, information indicating that the game ball has entered the right operative ball entry portion 63 (right operative opening 63a). As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a prize has been awarded to the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 (right-side operating opening 63a).

After that, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the reservation area Rb for the right operation opening (starting reservation storage number) is updated (1 is added). Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process ends.

In addition, when the game ball does not win in either the lower operation ball entry portion 62 or the right operation ball entry portion 63, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed during the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181 . In addition, if a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game cycle such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, it is notified. - Transmit to the effect control device 143 . Also, according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604, the output setting for the external terminal board 213 is performed.

Next, in step S202, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604 .

In the subsequent step S203, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, the determination of whether the jackpot is successful or not and the distribution of the jackpot type are performed, and the setting of the variable display of the pattern by the pattern display device 75, and the display for the operation opening in the main display unit 81 (main display section D) are performed. It performs display control of the parts DL, DR and the like.

Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like by this game state transition processing.

In the subsequent step S205, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is executed. In this electrical service support process, the information stored in the electrical service storage area of the RAM 604 is used to determine whether or not the electrical accessory 71 is to be opened. It performs display control of the display unit DS for the gate and the like.

In the subsequent step S206, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, on the condition that a shooting permission signal output from the power supply/shooting control device 191 is input based on the shooting operation being performed on the game ball shooting handle 41, a predetermined The solenoid 111 of the game ball shooting mechanism 110 is excited once during the shooting period (0.6 sec in this embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. In other words, when irregular hitting such as so-called stop hitting is not performed, the shooting of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on the condition that the shooting operation is performed.

In the subsequent step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when power failure occurrence is confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S209, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S210.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S211 onwards is executed. Specifically, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited in step S211, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212, and access to the RAM 604 is prohibited in step S213. continue the infinite loop until the process can no longer be executed.

(Game round control processing)
Here, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 16 to 20, the game round control process in step S203 will be supplementarily explained. As shown in FIG. 16, in the game round control process shown in the present embodiment, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S301, this game round control process is terminated as it is. When a negative determination is made in step S301, in step S302, the game round control processing for the game round related to winning to the lower operating opening 62 (lower operating opening 62a) (lower operating opening corresponding game round control processing, control processing for the lower operating port), and in step S303, the game round control processing for the game round related to winning to the right operating port 63 (right operating port 63a) (game round control corresponding to the right operating port) processing, control processing for the right operating port) is executed, this game round control processing is terminated. These two control processes have a common basic flow. 17 and 18, the control processing for the lower working port will be described first, and then, with reference to FIGS. Control processing will be described.

(Control process for lower working port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the control process for the lower working opening, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the lower working opening 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display portion DL for the lower activation port of the main display unit 81 is in the process of variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. This determination is made by storing (memorizing) the during-game flag (during-game information) for the lower opening in the during-game flag storage area (during-display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not The in-game flag for the lower opening is stored when the variable display is started in the lower opening display section DL, and is erased when the pattern is stopped and the fixed display ends.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress with respect to the right actuation opening 63a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display portion DR for the right operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the process of varying display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. This determination is made by storing (memorizing) the in-game flag (in-variation display information) for the right opening in the in-game flag storage area (in-variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not The game-in-progress flag for the right operating port is stored when the variable display is started in the display unit for the right operating port DR. is erased when

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the game round associated with the right operating port 63a corresponds to the big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S403, the control process for the lower working opening is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the total retention number storage area of the retention ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of retained storage numbers CRN for the lower working openings, which is the number of retained information retained and stored (more specifically, the retained information related to the lower working openings 62a number) is "0". If the number of reserved memories CRN for the lower opening is "0", the game round control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories CRN for the lower working port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the lower working port 62a, first, the lower working port reserved memory number CRN is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the lower working port reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the lower working port reservation area Ra is shifted. Execute the process that causes the

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on. Then, one of the LEDs lit in the reserved number display section for the lower opening is extinguished. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the reserving information is added, the LEDs of the reserving number display section SL for the lower opening are extinguished in order from the bottom.

After the data setting process described in detail above is performed, in step S406, the variable display for the lower working port for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display unit DL for the lower working port and the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are performed. After executing the start process (variation start process for the lower opening), the game round control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the lower working port variation start processing in step S406 will be described.

(Variation start processing for lower working port)
In the lower opening variation start process, first, in step S501, a suitability determination process is executed. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the lower opening is referred to, and among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, the information for the win/fail determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 is the above-mentioned jackpot value. It is determined whether or not it matches the information. When the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, information for type determination, that is, numerical information acquired from the win type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the grasped information for type determination corresponds to the information group corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variable jackpot result A. Information group, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot Which of the information group corresponding to the result A and the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is specified.

In step S504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for the jackpot result is stored in advance in the ROM 603, in which the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (lower operating port display portion DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is displayed. , and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S504, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM604. In addition, in step S504, the current game result is the 8R normal jackpot result, the 6R jackpot result A, the 6R jackpot result B, the 6R jackpot result C, the 6R jackpot result D, the 6R jackpot result E, and the 16R jackpot result. Information for specifying the result A or the 16R probability variable jackpot result B in the MPU 602 is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . Specifically, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot result, the 8R normal flag is stored, in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot result A, the 6R probability variable A flag is stored, and in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot result B, the 6R. A 6R probability variable B flag is stored, a 6R probability variable big hit result C is stored, a 6R probability variable C flag is stored, a 6R probability variable big hit result D is stored, a 6R probability variable D flag is stored, and a 6R probability variable big win result E is stored. In this case, the 6R probability variable E flag is stored, if the 16R probability variable big hit result A is stored, the 16R probability variable A flag is stored, and if the 16R probability variable big hit result B is stored, the 16R probability variable B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the right actuation opening 63a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. FIG. When the game cycle (picture variation display) relating to the right operating port 63a is being executed, the game cycle (picture variation display) relating to the right operating port 63a is forcibly interrupted based on the forced end flag. will be terminated. More specifically, when the game round associated with the lower actuation opening 62a corresponds to the big win result, and the game round associated with the right actuation opening 63a can be executed beyond the timing at which confirmation display is performed in the game round. In this case, the game cycle related to the right operating port 63a is shortened, and the game cycle related to the right operating port 63a ends together with the end of the game cycle related to the lower operating port 62a. In such a case, the symbols stopped and displayed in the game cycle related to the right actuation port 63a correspond to the result of losing.

Returning to the description of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is an outlier, a negative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed.

Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (lower operating port display portion DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game turn related to the start of the current variation is set to a pattern that is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 .

After executing the processing of steps S506 and S507, or when a negative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, setting processing of variable display time (display duration) is executed. The details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The variable start command includes variable display time information. Here, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence as described above is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach generation. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information of the variable display time in the notification / effect control device 143 which is a control device on the sub side. . In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. In addition, the information which directly shows the presence or absence of reach occurrence may be included in the fluctuation start command.

After executing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, and after starting the variable display of the lower working port display section DL in the main display unit 81, this lower working port variable start processing ends. In the process of step S510, the game running flag for the lower opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM604. As a result, in subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game cycle (for example, variable display) relating to the lower operation port 62a is being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17 again, if the determination in step S401 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress for the lower operation opening 62a, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special win result in the game cycle associated with the right operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round associated with the right operation port 63a and corresponding to the result of the big win. If negative determinations are made in steps S407 and S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S508 has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S409, the variable display process is executed in step S410, and then the control process for the lower opening is terminated. In the process for variable display in step S410, various LEDs constituting the lower opening display section DL are turned on/off to display a pattern in a variable manner.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, fluctuation end processing is executed. In the fluctuation end processing, display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display portion DL for the lower operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode. That is, for example, the final display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. It should be noted that the in-game flag for the bottom opening stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased when the confirmation display is completed.

After setting the fluctuation end command in the following step S413, this game round control process is ended. The fluctuation end command set at step S413 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/effect control device 143 executes processing for ending the effect in the game round based on the reception of the fluctuation end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification/production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the fluctuation end command, and responds to the game results of the game round. The symbol combination obtained is determined and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. - 特許庁In addition, without transmitting the fluctuation end command, the notification/production control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the production for the game cycle independently.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S407 or step S408, the stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S410, and after the processes in steps S412 and S413 are executed, the main operation opening is executed. end the control processing for In the process of rewriting the stop result, first, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the special winning result. When it does not correspond to the special winning result, rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the result of losing) determined in the fluctuation start process for the lower opening is avoided. On the other hand, if the game result of this time corresponds to the special winning result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special winning result) determined in the fluctuation start processing for the lower opening opening corresponds to the result. Rewrite to the pattern you want.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the control processing for the right operating port will be described.

(Control processing for right operation port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the control process for the right operating port, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the right operating port 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display portion DR for the right operating port of the main display unit 81 is in the process of varying display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. This determination is made by storing (memorizing) the in-game flag (in-variation display information) for the right opening in the in-game flag storage area (in-variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not The game-in-progress flag for the right operating port is stored when the variable display is started in the display portion DR for the right operating port, and is erased when the pattern is stopped and the final display ends.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress for the lower operation opening 62a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display portion DL for the lower opening of the main display unit 81 is in the process of variable display to fixed display, ie, whether or not one game is being executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the lower operation port 62a corresponds to the big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the control processing for the right operation port ends. If a negative determination is made in step S603 or if a negative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total retention number storage area of the retention ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of retention information for the right operation opening CRN, which is the number of retention information retained and stored (more specifically, the retention information related to the right operation opening 63a number) is "0". When the reserved memory number CRN for the right operation opening is "0", the game round control processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories CRN for the right operation port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the right operating port 63a, first, the right operating port reserved memory number CRN is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the right operation opening reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the right operation opening reservation area Rb is shifted. Execute the process that causes the

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the reserved number display section for the right operation opening is extinguished. In this extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the reserving information is added, the LEDs of the reserving lamp portion for the right operation opening are turned off in order from the bottom.

After performing the data setting process detailed above, in step S606, the right operation port for starting the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 81 (main display section D) and the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 After executing the variation start process for the right operation opening (variation start process for the right operation opening), the game round control process is terminated.

Now, with reference to FIG. 20, the right operating port variation start processing in step S606 will be described.

(Variation start processing for right operation port)
In the variation start process for the right operating opening, first, in step S701, a suitability determination process is executed. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the right opening is referred to, and among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, the information for the win/fail determination, that is, the numerical value information related to the hit random number counter C1 is the above-mentioned jackpot value. It is determined whether or not it matches the information. When the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, the information for type determination, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the winning type counter C2 and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 are used. With reference to the table, the above grasped information for type determination is the information group corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 2R probability variable jackpot result, the information group corresponding to the 6R probability variable jackpot result A, and the 6R probability variable jackpot. Information group corresponding to result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, information corresponding to 16R probability variation jackpot result A The information group corresponding to the group or the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is specified.

In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for the jackpot result is stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (right operation port display portion DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance. , and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 . A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion D are set in the stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S704, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM604. Also, in step S704, the current game result is the 2R normal jackpot result, the 2R jackpot result, the 6R jackpot result A, the 6R jackpot result B, the 6R jackpot result C, the 6R jackpot result D, and the 6R jackpot result. E, 16R probability variable jackpot result A, 16R probability variable jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 for the MPU 602 to specify. Specifically, if it is a 2R normal jackpot result, it stores a 2R normal flag, if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot result, it stores a 2R probability variable flag, and if it is a 6R probability variable jackpot result A, it stores a 6R probability variable A. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result B, the 6R probability variable B flag is stored, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result C, the 6R probability variable C flag is stored, and when the 6R probability variable jackpot result D is stored. stores a 6R probability variable D flag, stores a 6R probability variable E flag when it is a 6R probability variable jackpot result E, stores a 16R probability variable A flag when it is a 16R probability variable jackpot result A, and stores a 16R probability variable jackpot result B , the 16R probability variable B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the lower operation opening 62a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. FIG. When the game cycle (picture variation display) related to the lower activation port 62a is being executed, the game cycle (symbol variation display) related to the lower activation port 62a is forcibly midway based on the forced end flag. will be terminated. More specifically, when the game round associated with the right actuation opening 63a corresponds to the jackpot result, and the game round associated with the lower actuation opening 62a (response ) can be executed, the game cycle related to the lower activation port 62a is shortened, and the game cycle related to the lower activation port 62a ends together with the end of the game cycle related to the right activation port 63a. In such a case, the symbols stopped and displayed in the game cycle related to the lower actuation opening 62a correspond to the result of losing.

Returning to the description of step S702, when the determination result in step S701 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and an affirmative determination is made in step S707, and the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, a stop result setting process for special winning results is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (right operation opening display portion DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game cycle is stored in the ROM 603 in advance. It specifies from the table and stores the specified information in the RAM 604 . A plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion D are set in the stop result table for the special winning result, and in step S703, information indicating the pattern corresponding to the special winning result is stored in the RAM604. Incidentally, when the current game result is a special winning result, a special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 .

After executing the process of step S707, the processes of steps S704 and S705 described above are executed.

If the determination result in step S701 is an outlier, negative determinations are made in steps S702 and S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, a stop result setting process for the deviation result is executed. Specifically, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (right operation port display portion DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is set to the deviation stored in advance in the ROM 603 . It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604 .

After executing the process of step S706 or step S709, or when a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, a variable display time (display continuation time) setting process is executed. The details of the variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S710, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S711. The variable start command includes variable display time information. Here, the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach non-occurrence as described above is different from the variable display time acquired by referring to the variable display time table for reach generation. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach occurrence from the information of the variable display time in the notification / effect control device 143 which is a control device on the sub side. . In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. In addition, the information which directly shows the presence or absence of reach occurrence may be included in the fluctuation start command.

After executing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, and after starting the variable display of the display portion DR for the right operation opening in the main display unit 81, the variation start processing for the right operation opening ends. In the processing of step S712, the game-in-progress flag for the right operation port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM604. As a result, in subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game cycle (for example, variable display) relating to the right actuation opening 63a is being executed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, if the determination in step S601 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress for the right actuation opening 63a, the process proceeds to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round associated with the lower operation opening 62a and corresponding to the result of the big win. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not it is time to pass the variable display time. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the process for changing display is executed in step S610, and then this control process for the right operating port ends. In the process for variable display in step S610, various LEDs forming the display portion DR for the right operating port are turned on/off to display the pattern in a variable manner.

If the determination in step S609 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, fluctuation end processing is executed. In the fluctuation ending process, display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the display portion DR for the right operating port so as to be in a predetermined mode.

After setting the fluctuation end command in the following step S613, this game round control process is ended. The fluctuation end command set at step S613 is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/effect control device 143 executes processing for ending the effect in the game round based on the reception of the fluctuation end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification/production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the fluctuation end command, and responds to the game results of the game round. The symbol combination obtained is determined and displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. - 特許庁In addition, without transmitting the fluctuation end command, the notification/production control device 143 or the display control device 710 may end the production for the game cycle independently.

Returning to the description of step S608, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the process proceeds to step S611. That is, when it is the start timing of the game round corresponding to the big hit result in the game round related to the lower operation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, the stop result is rewritten.

In the process of rewriting the stop result, first, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the special winning result. If it does not correspond to the special hit result, rewriting of the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the loss result) determined in the variation start process for the right operating opening is avoided. On the other hand, if the current game result corresponds to the special winning result, the stop pattern (the pattern corresponding to the special winning result) determined in the variation start process for the right operating port is removed, and the result corresponds to the result. Rewrite to the pattern you want. After the process of step S611 is executed, the processes of steps S612 and S613 are executed, and then the control process for the right operating opening is terminated.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the game state transition processing of step S204 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 25. FIG. As already explained, in the present embodiment, there is a normal game state in which the game progresses based on the balls entering the operation ports 62a and 63a, and a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened. ) are provided. Regarding the normal game state, the first normal game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is a low frequency support mode, the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is high frequency. A second normal game state that is a support mode, a third normal game state that a lottery mode is a high probability mode and a support mode by an electric accessory 71 is a low frequency support mode, and a lottery mode is a low probability mode and a support by an electric accessory 71. The mode is composed of a fourth normal game state in which the mode is a high-frequency support mode, and switching between the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state is performed via a special game state corresponding to the result of a big win.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the game cycle (specifically, confirmation display) has ended. If it is not the timing when the game round is finished, the game state transition processing is finished as it is.

If the game cycle has ended, more specifically, if it is the timing at which a preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed since the end of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, whereupon the current time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the game result of the game round (result of the win/fail lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (open/close execution mode). Specifically, the RAM 604 stores the above-described 8R normal flag, 2R normal flag, 2R variable probability flag, 6R variable probability A flag, 6R variable probability B flag, 6R variable probability C flag, 6R variable probability D flag, 6R variable probability E flag, 16R variable probability A It is determined whether or not either the flag or the 16R probability variable B flag is stored. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing is terminated.

If any one of the above flags is stored, processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start process, first, a waiting time for opening (waiting time for start) for making the variable winning device 65 wait without starting opening the upper big winning port 311 of the variable winning device 65 for opening the opening/closing execution mode. set. Specifically, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 .

The waiting time for opening (opening time) in the present embodiment differs depending on the type of win. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening in the case of a jackpot result is 5 seconds, while the waiting time for the opening in the case of a special winning result is a shorter time, specifically 8 msec. It's becoming

In the subsequent step S805, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time corresponds to the big win result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the result of this big win is set in the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM604. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "2", and if the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "6". ' is set, and if the current jackpot result is an 8R jackpot result, "8" is set in the round number counter RC, and if the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result, "16" is set in the round number counter RC. ” is set. The round number counter RC is decremented each time a round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the current special game state ends.

In subsequent step S807, if a high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the high-frequency support mode flag is erased. As a result, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode during the special game state corresponding to the result of the big win.

Returning to the description of step S805, when a negative determination is made at step S805, that is, when the special game state is triggered by the special winning result, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, the second winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM604. After that, in step S809, the round number counter is set to "1". In the subsequent processing, based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set, it is determined that the current special game state corresponds to the special winning result.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, an opening command setting process is performed. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification/effect control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/production control device 143, the display corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the pattern display device 75 is executed so that the moving image display of the character, etc., and the switching of the background image, etc. are performed.

After executing the opening command setting process in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811, and the game state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process of step S811, it is determined whether or not any one of the various jackpot flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604. If any flag is stored, the game hall side A signal indicating that a big win or a special win has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC). By receiving this external signal, the management control device recognizes that the game has transitioned to the special game state (opening/closing execution mode).

Returning to the description of step S801, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the standby time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 22 to 24, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described.

(Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening)
As shown in FIG. 22, in the big winning opening opening/closing process, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S901. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process advances to step S902 to execute the first opening/closing process. The first opening/closing process is a process executed in a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot result.

(First opening/closing process)
As shown in FIG. 23, in the first opening/closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper special winning opening 311) is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive section 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 . If the upper big winning opening 311 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening/closing process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when ascertaining the opening time and interval time (interval interval time between rounds) of the upper grand prize winning opening 311, and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, The value is decremented by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening/closing process ends.

When the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process advances to step S1004 to execute opening processing of the upper variable prize winning device 64 (upper special prize winning port 311). do. Specifically, the variable winning driving unit 451 is brought into a driving state so as to open the upper big winning opening 311 .

After that, the processing of steps S1005 and S1006 is executed as the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 (upper big winning opening 311). Specifically, in step S1005, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and in the following step S1006, the winning counter PC is set to "9".

In the following step S1007, it is determined whether or not it is the first round (first round) in the current special game state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the special game state of this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. When the affirmative determination is made in step S1008, flow path switching processing for probability variation is executed in step S1009. In the probability variable flow path switching process, the drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruded position to the retracted position, and the duration of the output of the drive signal is set. . This continuation time is the same as the maximum opening time of the upper special prize winning opening 311 . Therefore, when the game balls are continuously shot to the right route, most of them will win the advantageous ball entry section 314, and the transition to the high probability mode will be confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008, normal flow channel switching processing is executed in step S1010. In the normal channel switching process, similarly to the probability variable channel switching process, the drive signal is output to the channel switching drive unit 452 to move the channel switching member 316 from the protruded position to the retracted position, and the drive signal Sets the duration to continue the output of . This continuation time is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper special prize winning opening 311 . More specifically, the time is set to be shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper big winning opening 311 to reach the advantageous ball entry portion 314 (specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319). Therefore, even if game balls are continuously shot to the right route, winning to the advantageous ball entry section 314 is basically avoided.

After executing the channel switching process in steps S1009 and S1010, or when a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, an opening command indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper big winning opening 311) has been opened is set, and the first opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 at step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 15). The notification/effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S1001, when it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper special winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether or not it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to the projecting position. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the projecting position.

If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return processing in step S1013 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1015, and whether or not the game ball has entered the upper big winning opening 311 is detected from the upstream detection sensor 317 provided in the upper variable winning device 64. based on the detection information (detection signal).

If a prize has been won, output processing of a prize command is executed in step S1016. The winning command is output to the notification/effect control device 143, and the notification/effect control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. At step S1017, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1. At the following step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". finish.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, that is, if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1014 (that is, if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0") case) means that the condition for closing the big winning slot is established. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning driving unit 451 is put into a non-driving state in order to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper big winning opening 311).

In subsequent step S1020, it is determined whether or not the flow path switching member 316 is arranged at the retracted position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, then in step S1021 the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the projecting position.

After executing the return processing in step S1021, or when a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process advances to step S1022 to execute update processing of the round number counter RC. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the round number counter RC is Keep the value of '0'.

After that, in step S1023, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the round number counter RC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1023, the process advances to step S1024 to set "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) to the timer counter TC1.

After executing the process of step S1024, a closing command is set in step S1025, and the first opening/closing process ends. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification/production control device 143 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/effect control device 143 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S1023, if it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time (5 sec in this embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 .

After that, in step S1027, after setting the ending command, the first opening/closing process ends. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, if the determination in step S901 is affirmative, the second opening/closing process in step S903 is executed. The second opening/closing process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Second opening/closing process)
In the second opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the lower variable winning device 65 (lower big winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning driving section 461 of the lower variable winning device 65 . When the lower special winning opening 341 is not open, the process of opening the lower variable winning device 65 (lower special winning opening 341) is executed in step S1102. Specifically, the variable winning driving unit 461 is brought into a driving state so as to open the lower special winning opening 341 .

After that, the processing of steps S1103 and S1104 is executed as the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower big winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, the timer counter TC1 is set to "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec), and in the following step S1104, the winning counter PC is set to "9".

Returning to the description of step S1101, when it is determined that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower special winning opening 341) is open at step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". Determine whether or not When the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1106, and whether or not the game ball has entered the lower large winning opening 341 is detected by the entering ball detection sensor provided in the lower variable winning device 65. A determination is made based on the detection signal.

If a prize has been won, output processing of a prize command is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification/effect control device 143, and the notification/effect control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. At step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and at the subsequent step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". do.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, that is, if the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1105 (that is, if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0") case) means that the condition for closing the big winning slot is established. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning driving unit 461 is brought into a non-driving state to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower big winning opening 341).

In the following step S1111, ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time (0.2 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game cycle for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 .

After that, in step S1112, after setting the ending command, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S814, this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, at step S816, after executing the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the present game is executed. Terminate state transition processing. Now, with reference to FIG. 25, transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode)
In the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the first winning mode. If the game corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the current special game state. When a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203. As a result, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode in the subsequent normal game state.

After executing the process of step S1203, or when a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the shift to the high-frequency support mode. When the affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1205, and the number of games provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 in the subsequent step S1206. A value corresponding to the result of this big win is set in the counter. The number-of-games counter is decremented each time a game is played, and when the value of the number-of-games counter becomes "0", the mode is shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, for example, when the 16R probability variable jackpot result is based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a in the second normal game state to the third normal game state , the transition to the high-frequency support mode is avoided.

After executing the process of step S1206, or when a negative determination is made in steps S1201 and S1204, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the various flags for the special game state (for example, the winning mode flag, the jackpot flag, etc.) stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and this shift processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the electrician support process executed in step S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the electric power support process, FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram comparing the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the electric power opening/closing process.

(Processing for electronic support)
In the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supported flag is stored in a supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating port 63a is switched to the open state, and is erased when the electric accessory 71 is returned to the closed state.

If the supported flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when an open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 is won, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electronic support process is terminated.

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the process advances to step S1304 to determine whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, after setting the deviation display and setting the timer counter TC2 to "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec), the electronic support process is ended. . When the failure display is set, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is terminated while the failure display is stopped, and this failure display is continued for 0.5 sec (FIG. 27). reference).

When the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process advances to step S1306 to determine whether or not the value of the accessory reserved storage number SN is greater than "0". When the value of the number SN of the accessory reserved storage is "0", the electronic role support processing is terminated as it is. When the value of the number SN of accessory reserved storage is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1307 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the high-frequency support mode is on, an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined by a lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the role product holding ball storage area of the electric role storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area is stored in the success/failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed by referring to the lottery table for the high-frequency support mode. Simultaneously with the opening lottery, the variable display time table corresponding to the high-frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603 is referred to and the timer counter TC2 is set to "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec). The timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.2 seconds, the through-gate display section DS continues to display the changing pattern (see FIG. 27).

In subsequent step S1309, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1308 is a winning result (support winning). If it is not the support win, the process for supporting the main electronic role is terminated as it is. In the case of support winning, a support winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1310, and the electronic role support processing is terminated.

If the low-frequency support mode is on, a negative determination is made in step S1307, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined by a lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the role product holding ball storage area of the electric role storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area is stored in the success/failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. The open lottery is performed by referring to the lottery table for the low-frequency support mode. Simultaneously with the opening lottery, the variable display time table corresponding to the low-frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603 is referred to and the timer counter TC2 is set to "350" (that is, equivalent to 0.7 sec). After that, until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.7 seconds, the through-gate display section DS continues to display the changing pattern (see FIG. 27).

In subsequent step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1311 is a winning result (support winning). If it is not the support win, the process for supporting the main electronic role is terminated as it is. In the case of support winning, a support winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1313, and the electronic role support processing is terminated.

In addition, the probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (249/250 in detail) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (248/250 in detail), and high-frequency support mode is preferred.

Returning to the description of step S1302 in FIG. 26, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1314, and the value of the timer counter TC2 increases. It is determined whether or not it is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", it means that the through-gate display section DS is in the process of changing the pattern display, and the electronic role support process is terminated. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1315. As a result, the variation display of the pattern on the character object display section 44 is terminated while the win display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1316, the supporting flag is set in the various flags storage area 635, and after erasing the support winning flag stored in the various flags storage area 635, the electronic role support process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1301, if the determination in step S1301 is affirmative, that is, if the supported flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1317, and the electric accessory 71 is opened and closed. After executing the electric power opening/closing process for controlling, the electric power support process is terminated. The electrical opening/closing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Electrical opening/closing process)
In the electric opening/closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 332 is in a driving state. When the electric accessory 71 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of winning prizes after opening the right operation port 63a to which the electric accessory 71 is attached reaches the upper limit ("10" in this embodiment). determine whether or not there is If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process advances to step S1403 to determine whether the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", or when it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, closing processing for switching (returning) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state is performed. After that, in step S1405, the supporting flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and the electric opening/closing process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. When the timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1407, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed.

After that, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is on. If the high-frequency support mode is on, the timer counter TC2 is set to "2850" (equivalent to 5.7 sec) in step S1409, and then the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec) in step S1410, and then the electrical opening/closing process is terminated (see FIG. 27).

(Relationship between game state and variable display time)
As already described, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the lower actuation opening 62a and the right actuation opening 63a, and based on the acquired hold information, the pattern and pattern of the game round are displayed. The configuration is such that variable display to fixed display are executed. Here, the pattern and the variable display time of the pattern are configured to be set according to the game state. 29 to 31, the configuration related to the setting of the fluctuation display time (variation display time setting process in the fluctuation start process for the lower opening (see FIG. 18) and the fluctuation in the fluctuation start process for the upper opening will be described below with reference to FIGS. A supplementary description of the display time setting process (see FIG. 19) will be given. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variation display time setting process (variation display time setting process for the lower opening) in the variation start process for the lower opening, and FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation display time setting process for the right opening. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the variable display time.

(Variation display time setting process for lower opening)
As shown in FIG. 29, in the variable display time setting process for the lower opening, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, after executing the setting process for the first normal game state in step S1502, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Then, the variable display time is set according to the number of reservation information stored in the lower working opening reservation area Ra in the reservation ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning lottery, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence.

Regarding the fluctuation display time, when comparing the jackpot result and the lost result, the former tends to be longer than the latter. case) is configured to be shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. FIG. 31(a1) exemplifies the variable display time in the case of being completely out in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", any one of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any one of "7, 8, 9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "3" or "4" Any one of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the display portion DL for the lower operating port and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the second normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, after executing the second normal game state setting process in step S1504, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

In the second normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the lottery. ing. Specifically, in the second normal game state, the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is set to "0.5 sec" for any game round (Fig. 31 ( See a2)), the variable display time is shorter than in the first normal game state.

Details will be described later, but in the second normal game state, by shooting a game ball to the right route formed in the game area PE, the game is more advantageous to the player than when aiming at the left route. We will proceed. The game ball launched to the right route enters the right operating port 63a, and the game progresses mainly based on the hold information related to the right operating port 63a. Under such circumstances, the player may be puzzled by the interruption of the game cycle corresponding to the lower operating port 62a having a lower advantage than the right operating port 63a. In the present embodiment, in consideration of such circumstances, after the transition to the second normal game state, by quickly digesting the game round corresponding to the lower operation opening 62a, the occurrence of the above inconvenience is suppressed. ing.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 of FIG. 29, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, after executing the setting process for the third normal game state in step S1506, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the lottery. ing. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is set to "0.5 sec" for any game round (Fig. 31 ( a3)).

When the negative determination is made in step S1505 of FIG. 29, that is, when the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the setting process for the fourth normal game state is performed. After execution, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

In the fourth normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the selection candidate for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of reserved information stored and the result of the lottery. ing. Specifically, in the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is set to "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is set to "0.5 sec" for any game round (Fig. 31 ( a4)).

(Variation display time setting processing for right operation port)
As shown in FIG. 30, in the variable display time setting process for the right operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, after executing the setting process for the first normal game state in step S1602, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the first normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. and set the variable display time. The variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the right working port is a different table from the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the lower working port.

In the first normal game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of reservation information stored in the right operation opening reservation area Rb in the reservation ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning lottery, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, etc. Selection candidates for the variable display time are limited to one. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the variable display time is set to "600 sec" and the fixed display time is set to "1 sec" for any game round (see FIG. 31(b1)). . The game ball launched to the right route in the first normal game state can enter the right actuation opening 63a, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the right actuation opening 63a is "1" and the right actuation. It is necessary to wait 600 seconds until the lottery result based on the winning to the mouth 63a is obtained. As a result, the act of shooting the game ball aiming at the right route in the first normal game state to advance the game advantageously is suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the second normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, after executing the setting process for the second normal game state in step S1604, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the second normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the second normal game state, when the big win result, the special win result and the losing result are compared, the former tends to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a failure result and no ready-to-reach display occurs (complete failure), the variable display time is shortened as the number of pending information stored increases. In addition, in the case of a special winning result, the ready-to-win display does not occur in the same way as in the case of a complete loss. ing.

FIG. 31(b2) shows the variable display time in the case of a special hit or a complete miss in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", "13 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "1" "8 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is "2", "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is "3". or "4", "1 sec" is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are both unified to be "1 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 of FIG. 30, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, after executing the third normal game state setting process in step S1606, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the third normal game state, when the big win result, the special win result and the losing result are compared, the former tends to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a failure result and no ready-to-reach display occurs (complete failure), the variable display time is shortened as the number of pending information stored increases. In addition, in the case of a special winning result, the ready-to-win display does not occur in the same way as in the case of a complete loss. ing.

FIG. 31(b3) shows the variable display time in the case of a special hit or a complete miss in the third normal game state. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" to "2", "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "3" to " 4", "0.5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are both unified to be "1 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S1605 of FIG. 30, that is, if the fourth normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1607 to perform the setting process for the fourth normal game state. After execution, this variable display time setting process is terminated.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the fourth normal game state, when comparing the big win result with the special win result and the lost result, the former tends to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a failure result and no ready-to-reach display occurs (complete failure), the variable display time is shortened as the number of pending information stored increases. In addition, in the case of a special winning result, the ready-to-win display does not occur in the same way as in the case of a complete loss. ing.

FIG. 31(b4) shows the variable display time in the case of being completely out in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", "13 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored pending information is "1" "8 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is "2", "4 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is "3". " or "4", "2.5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port and the fixed display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 75 are both unified to be "1 sec".

In the present embodiment, the diversification of games is realized by switching between the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In particular, when transitioning to the third normal game state through the second normal game state, the hurdle depends on the number of times the high-frequency support mode is continued (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction number"). there is Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 32, the relationship between the types of jackpot results and the number of times of time saving will be described.

(Time saving times)
When the 8R normal jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the lower operation port 62a, regardless of the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning, "50" times as the number of times of time reduction. is set. As described above, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the result of the 8R normal jackpot, although the advantageous ball entrance section 314 is temporarily opened, the game ball that has flowed into the upper big winning opening 311 is advantageous. The advantageous ball entry portion 314 is closed before reaching the ball portion 314, so that the ball entering the advantageous ball entry portion 314 is substantially avoided.

When the 6R probability variable jackpot result A is obtained based on the prize winning to the lower operation port 62a, regardless of the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning, "100" as the number of time saving times times are set. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained, regardless of whether or not the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning, "70" times are set as the number of times of time saving. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result C is obtained, regardless of whether or not the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning, "50" times are set as the number of times of time saving. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result D is obtained, "30" times are set as the number of times of time saving regardless of the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result E is obtained, regardless of the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the game state at the time of winning, "10" times are set as the number of times of time saving.

In addition, as described above, in the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) corresponding to the 6R probability variable jackpot result A to 6R probability variable jackpot result E, when the game ball is continuously launched toward the right route Most of them are configured so that the ball enters the advantageous ball entry part 314, and it suppresses the avoidance of the transition to the high probability mode even though the probability variable jackpot results. .

When the 16R probability variable jackpot result A or the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning to the lower operation port 62a, regardless of the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning, "0" times is set as the number of times of time saving. In other words, in these jackpot results, after the end of the special game state (opening and closing execution mode) does not shift to the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, the game moves to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314. If not, it shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

When the 2R normal jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, regardless of the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the game state at the time of winning, "50" times as the number of times of time saving. is set. As described above, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the result of the 2R normal jackpot, although the advantageous ball entrance section 314 is temporarily opened, the game ball that has flowed into the upper big winning opening 311 is advantageous. The advantageous ball entry portion 314 is closed before reaching the ball portion 314, so that the ball entering the advantageous ball entry portion 314 is substantially avoided.

In the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot result based on winning a prize to the right operation port 63a, regardless of the presence or absence of a ball entering the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the game state at the time of winning, "50" times will be used as the number of times to save time. set.

When the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry portion 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result A based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, "100" times are set as the number of times of time saving. be. When the 6R variable probability big hit result A is obtained and a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry part 314, the number of times of time saving set depending on the game state at the time when the 6R probability variable big hit result A is obtained is different. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result A is obtained during the first normal game state, "1000" times is set as the number of times of time reduction, and the 6R probability variable jackpot result A is set during the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state. In this case, "100" times is set as the number of times of time saving.

When the 6R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, the number of times of time saving is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal game state, even though the 6R probability variable big hit result B was obtained, if the ball did not enter the advantageous ball entering section 314, "100" times were set as the number of times of time saving. It is set, and in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in spite of the 6R probability variable jackpot result B, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314, the time saving number of times " 70" times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry portion 314, "1000" times are set as the number of time reduction, and the second normal game state is set. ~ In the fourth normal game state, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained and a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314, "70 times" is set as the number of times of time saving.

When the 6R probability variable jackpot result C is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, the number of times of time saving is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal game state, even though the 6R probability variable big hit result C was obtained, if the ball did not enter the advantageous ball entering section 314, "100" times were set as the number of times of time saving. It is set, and in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in spite of the 6R probability variable jackpot result C, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314, the time saving number of times " 50” times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result C is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry portion 314, "1000" times are set as the number of times of time saving, and the second normal game state. ~ When the 6R probability variable jackpot result C is obtained in the fourth normal game state and a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314, "50 times" is set as the number of times of time reduction.

When the 6R probability variable jackpot result D is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, the number of times of time saving is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal game state, even though the 6R probability variable big hit result D was obtained, if the ball did not enter the advantageous ball entering section 314, "100" times were set as the number of times of time saving. It is set, and in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in spite of the 6R probability variable jackpot result D, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314, the time saving number of times " 30" times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result D is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry portion 314, "1000" times are set as the number of time reduction, and the second normal game state is set. ~ When the 6R probability variable jackpot result D is obtained in the fourth normal game state and a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314, "30 times" is set as the number of times of time saving.

When the 6R probability variable jackpot result E is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, the number of times of time saving is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal game state, in spite of the 6R probability variable big hit result E, when the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entering section 314, "100" times are used as the number of times of time saving. It is set, and in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in spite of the 6R probability variable jackpot result E, when the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry part 314, the time saving number of times " 10" times is set. On the other hand, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result E is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry portion 314, "1000" times are set as the number of times of time reduction, and the second normal game state is set. ~ In the fourth normal game state, when the 6R probability variable jackpot result E is obtained and a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314, "10 times" is set as the number of times of time saving.

When the 16R probability variable jackpot result A is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, the number of times of time saving is set according to the presence or absence of the ball entering the advantageous ball entering portion 314 and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, in the first normal game state, even though the 16R probability variable big hit result A was obtained, if the ball did not enter the advantageous ball entering section 314, "100" times were set as the number of times of time saving. It is set and shifts to the high frequency support mode (shifts to the fourth normal game state). In the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in spite of the 6R probability variable jackpot result A, when the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry part 314, the number of times of time reduction is "0" times. is set, and does not shift to the high-frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal game state). On the other hand, when the 16R probability variable jackpot result A is obtained in the first normal game state and the ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314, "1000" times are set as the number of times of time reduction, and the high frequency support mode is entered. Transition (shift to the second normal game state). In the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, when the 16R probability variable jackpot result A is obtained and a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry part 314, "0" times are set as the number of times of time reduction, high frequency support mode Does not shift to (shifts to the second normal game state).

When the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning to the right operation port 63a, regardless of whether or not there is a ball entering the advantageous ball entering section 314 and regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the number of times of time saving is "0". times are set. Specifically, when the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entering section 314, the game moves to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314. occurs, the game moves to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) to be shifted when a jackpot result is obtained is a variable winning device to be opened and a first winning mode and a second winning mode having different opening/closing modes. broadly classified. When a jackpot result is obtained, the game moves to a special game state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the first prize mode (hereinafter referred to as the first special game state), the upper variable prize winning device 64 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (30 sec in detail) or a predetermined number of 9), the opening is repeated with multiple rounds as the upper limit. On the other hand, when a special winning result is obtained, the special game pattern corresponding to the second prize winning mode is entered. In the special game state corresponding to the second prize mode (hereinafter referred to as the second special game state), the lower variable prize winning device 65 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (more specifically, 0.8 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number of The second special game state ends when any one of (more specifically, 9) ball entry is established. Thus, the first special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low. there is a difference.

(Game flow)
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the basic game flow will be described. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

In the first normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode, a jackpot lottery is executed by winning a prize to the lower operation port 62a arranged in the game area PE (left route). The first normal game state is set so that the player's advantage is lower than other normal game states.

When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal game state, the game moves to the first special game state (opening/closing execution mode). In the first special game state, the advantageous ball entry section 314 is opened according to the type of the jackpot result. When a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the high probability mode. When no ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the low probability mode.

More specifically, when the current first special game state is triggered by the 8R normal jackpot result or the 2R normal jackpot result, entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 is substantially avoided. Therefore, the game state after the end of the first special game state becomes the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The fourth normal game state is maintained until the number of games executed in the fourth normal game state reaches a specified number (50 times in this embodiment), and when the number of games executed reaches the specified number A transition is made to a first normal game state set so that the player's advantage is lower than in the fourth normal game state. In the fourth normal game state, although there is an upper limit to the number of games played, the support of the electric accessory 71 allows the game to be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Then, since the ball can be expected to enter the right operation port 63a, which is preferentially treated so that the distribution of the jackpot result is advantageous to the player, the second normal game state and the third normal game state are more advantageous than the fourth normal game state. It becomes a chance to shift to the game state.

As already explained, when a prize is awarded to the right operation opening 63a, most of the lottery based on the prize results in a special winning result. That is, in the fourth normal game state, almost all game rounds result in a special winning result, and each game round shifts to the second special game state. In the case of shifting to the second special game state, the lower variable prize winning device 65 is opened, but most of the game balls shot to the right route enter the right operation port 63a and leave the game area PE. It will be discharged, and winning to the lower variable winning device 65 is suppressed. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34, the movement of the game ball in the fourth normal game state will be described.

In the fourth normal game state, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is increased from 0.08 sec to 5.7 sec, thereby increasing the number of winnings to the right operation opening 63a. By shortening the variable display time of the through-gate display unit DS from 0.7 sec to 0.2 sec, the time (first interval time) during which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the closed state is shortened, and the right operation is performed. The number of game balls passing through the opening 63a is reduced. As a result, most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right actuation opening 63a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(a)→FIG. 34(b)→FIG. 34(c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is in the closed position based on the game ball passing through the through gate 66. to the open position, and the upstream passage portion 322 is cut off. As a result, game balls passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flow into the right operating port 63a. Here, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 (above-mentioned first specific area SE1) is set to be slightly longer than the above-mentioned first interval time. When the game balls are continuously shot, most of the game balls flow into the right operation port 63a, and movement to the lower variable winning device 65 side is avoided.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning to the lower variable prize winning device 65 (lower big prize winning opening 341) is "10", and the prize paid out by winning to the right actuating ball entering portion 63 (right actuating opening 63a). The number of balls is greater than "1". However, as described above, most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right actuation opening 63a, and prize balls due to winning the lower big winning opening 341 are rare. Therefore, in the fourth normal game state, although the game can be progressed while suppressing the decrease in the number of held balls, it is practically difficult to increase the number of held balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the shooting interval time when game balls are continuously shot to the right route in the fourth normal game state is "0.6 sec", and the closing time of the electric accessory 71 is approximately " 0.7 sec", the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is "5.7 sec", the required time for the game cycle is "2 sec", and the required time for the second special game state is "0.8 sec". For the above reasons, when the game ball is continuously shot to the right route in the fourth normal game state, winning exceeding the holding upper limit of the right operation port 63a, that is, over winning that new holding information is not acquired will occur frequently. Even in this case, since the winning ball based on the winning to the right operation opening 63a is secured, the reduction speed of the owned balls is clearly slowed down.

Returning to the description of FIG. 33, when the first special game state of this time is triggered by the 6R probability variable jackpot result A to 6R probability variable jackpot result E or the 2R probability variable jackpot result, continue shooting the game ball toward the right route. As long as it does, the ball will enter the advantageous ball-entering portion 314 . Therefore, in most cases, the game state after the end of the first special game state is the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

In the second normal game state, the second normal game state is maintained and executed until the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches a specified number (10 to 100 times in the present embodiment). When the number of games played reaches a prescribed number, the game is shifted to a third normal game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

During the second normal game state, a game counter is displayed on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75 as information corresponding to the number of remaining games until reaching the specified number. The displayed game counter is counted down as the game progresses, and when the specified number is reached and the remaining number of times becomes "0", a display effect corresponding to the transition to the third normal game state is displayed. will be executed. As a result, the transition to the third normal game state is specified.

As with the fourth normal game state, the second normal game state also corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and the support of the electric accessory 71 allows the game to be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. At this time, although the lower variable winning device 65 is opened by winning to the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right operating port 63a and go downstream of the right operating port 63a. Reaching the arranged lower variable winning device 65 is suppressed. For this reason, it is substantially difficult to increase the number of possession balls in the second normal game state as well as in the fourth normal game state. Please refer to FIG. 34 for the flow of game balls in the second normal game state.

In the second normal game state, when the number of pending information (holding number) is "3" to "4", the variable display time is "1 sec", and the variable display time in the fourth normal game state ( "2.5 sec"). By shortening the variable display time in this manner, the second normal game state is differentiated so that the progress speed of the game is faster than that in the fourth normal game state.

In the second normal game state, when the number of games played without a big win reaches a specified number, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, unlike the high-frequency support mode, the high-probability mode does not have an upper limit on the number of games played. Therefore, when the specified number is reached, the state shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, when a prize is awarded to the right operation opening 63a, most of the lottery based on the prize results in a special winning result. That is, in the third normal game state, almost all game rounds result in a special winning result, and each game round shifts to the second special game state. This point is the same as the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state.

However, in the case of shifting to the second special game state, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened, but some of the game balls shot to the right route pass through the right operation port 63a and go down. Heading to the side variable winning device 65, the number of possession balls will turn to increase due to the winning of the lower side variable winning device 65. Hereinafter, the movement of the game ball in the third normal game state will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

The third normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is shortened from "5.7 sec" to "0.08 sec", and the variable display of the through gate display section DS. The time is extended from '0.2 sec' to '0.7 sec'. That is, the period during which the electric accessory 71 is in the closed state becomes longer, and the period in which the electric accessory 71 is in the open state becomes shorter. Here, as described above, the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state for 1.2 sec, which is the sum of the variable display time 0.7 sec and the fixed display time 0.5 sec in the through-gate display section DS. , that is, a substantial interval time (hereinafter referred to as a second interval time). This second interval time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass above the shutter 331 (first specific area SE1). Therefore, some of the game balls launched to the right route pass through the right operation opening 63a and go to the lower variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In other words, the number of winnings to the right operation opening 63a is reduced, and the number of game balls passing through the right operation opening 63a is increased. As a result, the number of winnings to the lower prize winning opening 341 increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(a)→FIG. 35(b)→FIG. 35(c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is in the closed position based on the game ball passing through the through gate 66. to the open position, and the upstream passage portion 322 is cut off. As a result, game balls passing through the upstream passage portion 322 flow into the right operating port 63a. When a prize is awarded to the right operation port 63a, most of the lottery results are special winning results, and the lower variable prize winning device 65 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 35(d)→FIG. 36(e), when the game ball passing through the right operation port 63a wins the lower variable prize winning device 65 side, "10" prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning the lower variable prize winning device 65 (lower big prize winning port 341) is 1. “There are more than one. As a result, the number of balls held will increase.

Here, the required time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is longer than the game ball firing cycle "0.6 sec", and the electric accessory 71 changes from the open state to the closed state to the open state. The interval time is "1.2 sec". The time "0.08 sec" during which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the open state is longer than the time required for the game ball placed on the shutter 331 to pass through the right operation opening 63a. Therefore, when the game ball is continuously shot to the right route, every time the electric accessory 71 is opened, 1 win is generated to the right operation opening 63a and reaches the ball entering unit 70. Approximately half of the game balls enter the right operation opening 63a.

Further, in the third normal game state, when the number of reserved information stored (number of reservations) is "3" to "4", the change display time of the pattern of the display portion DR for the right operation port is 0.5 sec. Yes, the fixed display time is 1 sec, and the ending time at the end of the second special game state is 0.2 sec. That is, when the shift to the second special game state continues, the interval time required for the lower variable winning device 65 to change from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state is "1.7 sec". The time required for the game ball that has reached the lower variable winning device 65 to pass through the second specific area SE2 is longer than the interval time. Therefore, most of the game balls that have reached the lower variable winning device 65 out of the game balls that have passed through the right operation port 63a will enter the lower big winning port 341 (FIG. 36(e), FIG. 36(f)). In general, although some thinning may occur, about 1 out of 2 game balls that are launched in the right route and reach the entering ball unit 70 enter the right operation opening 63a, and about 1 out of 2 enter the lower large winning opening. 341 is achieved.

In addition, in the third normal game state, although the number of winnings and the winning rate to the right operation opening 63a are not as high as the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the number of balls entering the right operation opening 63a is constant. The game progresses such that the number of pending information items (number of pending items) relating to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4". However, strictly speaking, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it was a configuration in which the winning prize occurred frequently so as to greatly exceed the upper limit of the number of reservations, whereas in the third normal game state, the number of reservations Winning just slightly above the upper limit is generated. However, in view of the fact that new pending information is not acquired when the number of wins exceeding the upper limit occurs, the change in the actual number of pending prizes is not affected as much as the difference in the number of wins or the winning rate. In other words, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it is a configuration in which winning is likely to occur by exceeding the upper limit of the number of reservations, and compared to the third normal game state, there are more winnings in which the reservation information is not acquired. differentiated to be more

Here, the condition for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is to digest the game times of the upper limit (the specified number of times or the number of time reductions) set at the time of transition to the second normal game state. However, this upper limit varies depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the second normal game state. For example, in the 2R probability variable jackpot result, "50" times is set as the upper limit, in the 6R probability variable jackpot result A, "100" times is set as the upper limit, and in the 6R probability variable jackpot result B, "70" times is set as the upper limit, and 6R In the probability variable jackpot result C, the upper limit is set to "50" times, in the 6R probability variable jackpot result D, the upper limit is set to "30" times, and in the 6R probability variable jackpot result E, the upper limit is set to "10" times. That is, the probability of transition to the third normal game state increases in the order of 6R probability variable jackpot result A < 6R probability variable jackpot result B < 6R probability variable jackpot result C, 2R probability variable jackpot result < 6R probability variable jackpot result D < 6R probability variable jackpot result E. is configured as By providing different hurdles for transition to the third normal game state in this way, the diversification of games is realized.

When a big hit result is obtained in the third normal game state, the game is shifted to the first special game state. If the first special game state of this time is triggered by the 16R probability variable jackpot result A or the 16R probability variable jackpot result B, immediately after the first special game state is completed, it returns to the third normal game state and has It will be a chance to increase the number of balls. On the other hand, if the current third normal game state is triggered by any of the 2R probability variable jackpot result and the 6R probability variable jackpot result A to 6R probability variable jackpot result E, after the first special game state ends After shifting to the second normal game state, the game is played with the aim of shifting to the third normal game state again.

In the present embodiment, although there remains a chance of returning to the third normal game state in any of the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the second normal game state is passed through. When the return to the third normal game state is considered, the difference is provided so that the second normal game state is easier to return than the fourth normal game state.

As described in detail above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to generate two states in which the number of held balls is increased in different ways. It suppresses the game progress from becoming monotonous in a game state. Here, with reference to FIG. 37, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between the game flow and the balls held in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

When the game ball is shot to the left route in the first normal game state, the number of possessed balls decreases as the game progresses. In this way, under the condition that the investment continues, a big win results, and when the state shifts to the first special game state, winnings to the upper variable prize winning device 64 occur frequently, and the number of owned balls greatly increases. Specifically, the first special game state is configured such that substantially nine balls can be entered during the round game. Since 14 game balls are paid out by winning one prize, 126 game balls can be obtained in one round. Since this round game is repeated a plurality of times after an interval time of 2 sec, it becomes a chance to acquire a large amount of game balls at once.

In the first round in the first special game state, the advantageous ball entry section 314 is opened. When a ball is entered into the advantageous ball entry section 314 in this round, the state shifts to the second normal game state after the end of the first special game state. In the second normal game state, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 becomes the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls shot to the right route enter the right operation port 63a, but the number of prize balls paid out by winning the right operation port 63a is one. In view of the fact that some of the game balls launched to the right route are ejected from the game area PE without entering the ball entry portion corresponding to any prize ball, even in the second normal game state will gradually decrease. However, since a winning ball can be obtained by winning the right operation opening 63a, the decreasing speed of the holding ball compared with the first normal game state becomes gentle.

As already explained, when the number of games completed without a big win after shifting to the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, the game shifts to the third normal game state. In the third normal game state, although the high probability mode is maintained, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game balls passing through the right operation opening 63a increases. Most of the game balls that pass through the right actuation opening 63a enter the lower special winning opening 341. As described above, about half of the game balls that have reached the ball entry unit 70 are directed to the lower variable winning device 65, and each time the second special game state is entered and the lower variable winning device 65 is in the receiving state. Approximately one prize will be generated in each event. Since the number of prize balls paid out by winning to the lower variable prize winning device 65 is 10, the number of possessed balls increases by 10 each time the game shifts to the second special game state. In other words, the number of holding balls increases by about 10 each time the game is played. In view of such circumstances, when the state is shifted to the third normal game state, the transition to the third special game state may be repeated due to the special winning result until the next big winning result is obtained. It will be a chance to increase the ball big.

(Reduced time)
As described in detail above, when the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is shifted to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the right side operation ball entrance part 63 is skipped. The number of game balls to be played increases, and those game balls enter the lower variable prize winning device 65 to pay out a large number of prize balls. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases. The third normal game state is continued until a jackpot result (normal jackpot result or probability variable jackpot result) is obtained during the third normal game state.

Until the third normal game state ends with a big win result, a special win result is repeatedly obtained, and by shifting to the second special game state each time, there is a chance to greatly increase possession balls. Therefore, in the third normal game state, it is assumed that the player's interest in the game is further increased and the player's desire to play increases, compared to the second normal game state in which an increase in possession balls cannot be substantially expected. The present embodiment is characterized in that the rhythm of the game progress is changed in accordance with such changes in the game state, thereby further enhancing the player's sense of exhilaration in accordance with the increase in the degree of advantage. is one of Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 31 again, a supplementary explanation will be given of the configuration related to the rhythm change of the game progress. As already explained, FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time set in game rounds corresponding to the loss result (more specifically, the complete loss result not corresponding to the ready-to-win display) or the special win result.

The fluctuation display time of the pattern in the display portion DL for the lower operation port provided in the main display unit 81 is the same between the second normal game state and the third normal game state (Fig. 31 (a2), (a3) )reference). On the other hand, the variation display time of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port is set so as to be shorter in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state.

Specifically, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, most of the lottery results based on the ball entering the right operation opening 63a are special winning results or missing results. As shown in FIG. 31(b2), in the second normal game state, when the number of reservations related to the right operation port 63a is "0", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or the losing result is "13 sec". When the number of reservations is "1", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or the losing result is "8 sec", and when the holding number is "2", the variable displaying time corresponding to the special winning result or the losing result. is "4 sec", and when the number of reservations is "3" to "4", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or the losing result is "1 sec". On the other hand, in the third normal game state, as shown in FIG. The corresponding variable display time is "4 sec", and when the number of reservations is "3" to "4", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or the losing result is "0.5 sec".

As described above, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route enters the right operating port 63a and avoids entering the lower operating port 62a. And, under the situation where game balls are continuously shot to the right route, the number of reservations related to the right operation port 63a is near the upper limit (“3” to “4”), and ball entry constantly occurs. Therefore, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route, the variation display time in most of the game rounds (the gaming machine related to the right actuation opening 63a) is "1 sec" in the second normal game state. , In the third normal game state, the variable display time in most of the game rounds (the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a) is "0.5 sec".

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the game flow in each game state will be described. FIG. 38(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, and FIG. 38(b) is the third normal game corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the state. In FIG. 38(a), as the game progresses, the number of reservations related to the right activation port 63a changes from "3" to "4", and a special winning result is obtained in each game round related to the right activation port 63a. The case where the second normal game state and the second special game state loop is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 38(b), as the game progresses, the number of reservations related to the right activation port 63a changes from "3" to "4", and a special winning result is obtained in each game round related to the right activation port 63a. A case where the third normal game state and the second special game state loop is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the second normal game state, after the variable display (1 sec) of the display portion DR for the right operating port is performed, the fixed display (1 sec) of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. It shifts to the second special game state at the timing of the end (completion). As a result, the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Although the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for "0.8 sec", most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the right operation port 63a and enter the lower variable winning device 65. prizes are substantially avoided. At the timing when the lower variable prize winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) of the second special game state has passed, the variable display of the right operation opening display portion DR is started again. After that, the game progresses in such a manner that the above-described series of flows are repeated until the time-saving number of times is consumed or a jackpot result is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the third normal game state, after the variable display (0.5 sec) of the display portion DR for the right operating port is executed, the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (1 sec). ) is completed (completed), the state shifts to the second special game state, and the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Then, the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for "0.8 sec" in the same manner as when the second normal game state is passed. Regarding game balls flowing down the right route, most of them flow into the right operation port 63a, but some of them pass through the right operation entering ball part 63 and go to the lower variable winning device 65. Then, each time those game balls enter the lower variable winning device 65, many prize balls are paid out. At the timing when the lower variable prize winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) has passed, the variable display of the right operation opening display portion DR is started again, and after that, the result is a big win. The game progresses in such a manner that the above-described series of flows are repeated until the transition to the special game state is made.

In the third normal game state, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the display portion DR for the right actuation port, the pattern is again changed in the display portion DR for the right actuation port through the confirmation display and the second special game state. The interval time (2.5 sec) until the display is started is, in the second normal game state, from the start of the variable display of the pattern in the display portion DR for the right operation opening, to the confirmation display → the second special game state. , and is shorter than the interval time (3 sec) until the variable display of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port starts again. That is, in the third normal game state, the progress speed of the game slightly increases as compared with the second normal game state.

In the third normal game state, a ball is entered into the lower variable winning device 65, so the attention to the second special game state increases. Therefore, the second special game state is more conspicuous than the second normal game state in which the ball entering the lower variable winning device 65 is substantially avoided. In the case of going back and forth between the normal game state and the second special game state, there is a high possibility that the second special game state stands out and gives the player the impression that the progress of the game is slowing down. There is a concern that this will hinder the enhancement of the player's sense of exhilaration. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, by increasing the progress speed of the game in the third normal game state as compared to the second normal game state, it is possible to make it difficult to give such an impression, and the third normal game state The effect of enhancing the player's sense of exhilaration can be favorably exhibited by the transition to the normal game state.

In addition, when the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the third normal game state, the interval time (1.7 sec) during which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state is the second When the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the normal game state, the interval time (2.2 sec) during which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state is shortened, and the lower variable The possibility that the game ball reaching the winning device 65 will pass through the lower variable winning device 65 is reduced. In this way, by shortening the interval time for waiting for release, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the game is accelerating while suppressing a large change in time.

As already described, in the present embodiment, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operation entrance sphere 63 can be switched between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, so that the right operation opening It is possible to make a difference in the frequency of ball entry into 63a. Considering such circumstances, it is considered preferable to shorten the variable display time in the case of the high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of hitting balls is high, in order to realize smooth progress of the game. However, as described above, when the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are compared, the high-frequency support mode is given preferential treatment in that more prize balls can be obtained based on the ball entering the right operation opening 63a. However, with regard to the number of pending information acquired based on ball entry, a storage upper limit is set for the pending information, and the storage limit is always exceeded for both the first normal game state and the third normal game state. There is no difference in that such ball entry occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by purposely shortening the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the speeding up of the game progress is realized.

The third normal game state is differentiated from the second normal game state in that an increase in the number of balls held by the player can be expected by repeating the transition to the second special game state. In the third normal game state, it is possible to emphasize the agility of the game by rhythmically looping the third normal game state/second special game state. Here, in the present embodiment, the game round related to the lower operating port 62a and the game round related to the right operating port 63a can proceed simultaneously (played in parallel). As shown, there is no special winning result in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a. That is, in spite of the transition to the third normal game state, if the game round related to the lower operation port 62a is executed, the lightness in the third normal game state described above will not be well transmitted to the player, or the game will be useless. There is a possibility that the player may give an impression as if the player has made a loss due to the progress of the game round. One of the features of the present embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. An outline of the device will be described below with reference to FIG.

As already explained, during the first special game state, neither the game round related to the lower operating port 62a nor the game round related to the right operating port 63a progresses. For this reason, in the first normal game state in the holding information related to the lower operation port 62a in the probability variable jackpot result and in the case of shifting to the second normal game state, the lower operation port 62a acquired during the first normal game state There is a possibility that the pending information related to is carried over to the second normal game state.

In the second normal game state, the number of times of time saving is basically set to be "10 times" to "100 times". Each time-saving number of times is subtracted by executing the game rounds related to the lower operation port 62a or the game rounds related to the right operation port 63a, and the second normal game state continues until the time-saving number becomes "0 times". In that case, the first special game state is skipped and the third normal game state is entered as it is. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions set in the second normal game state, even if the reservation information related to the lower operation port 62a remains when the transition to the second normal game state, the third normal game It is stipulated that all the pending information can be digested before the transition to the state (during the second normal game state). Thus, by avoiding carryover of the hold information to the third normal game state, the game proceeds based on the hold information relating to the right operation port 63a after the shift to the third normal game state. . A specific configuration for realizing such a function will be additionally described below with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. FIG. 40 illustrates a case where the number of reservations related to the right operation port 63a is "0" when shifting to the second normal game state, and FIG. The case where the number of pending|holding which concerns has reached the upper limit ("4") is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 40, when the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 62a reaches the memory upper limit ("4") at the timing of shifting to the second normal game state through the first special game state, the second 2 In the normal game state, the game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a are executed for the memory upper limit (4 times). In the second normal game state, regardless of the number of reservations related to the lower operation opening 62a, the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the lower operation opening display section DL is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec". ing. Therefore, the time required to execute the above upper limit number of games is (variation display time: 0.5 sec + fixed display time: 0.5 sec) x memory upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

Since the route advantageous to the player is changed from the left route to the right route along with the transition to the first special game state, the holding information related to the right operation port 63a is naturally acquired by shooting the game ball to the right route. It will be done. However, during the first special game state, the upper variable prize winning device 64 arranged on the upstream side of the right operating port 63a is switched to the open state, and the flow of game balls toward the right operating ball entering portion 63 is blocked. Therefore, even during the first special game state, the right operating ball entry portion 63 is switched to the open state, but most of the game balls do not reach the right operating ball entry portion 63 and enter the right operation opening 63a. is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the first special game state is terminated and the transition to the second normal game state occurs, a ball is entered into the right operation opening 63a, and accordingly, the pattern is displayed on the right operation opening display portion DR. has started to change. At this transition timing, the number of reservations related to the right actuation opening 63a is "0", so the variable display time in the display portion DR for the right actuation opening is "13 sec". Although most of the game rounds related to the right actuation opening 63a result in a special winning result, there is at least "13 seconds" until the confirmation display corresponding to the special winning result is executed at the right actuation opening 63a. . This time is longer than the required time required to digest all the pending information related to the lower working port 62a described above. Therefore, all of the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested before the number of times of shortening working hours that triggers the shift to the third normal game state is completed until the pattern variation display on the display portion DR for the right operating port ends. The Rukoto. And about the minimum number of times of time reduction set, it is more than the upper limit number (more specifically, upper limit number + 1) of the reservation information concerning lower operation mouth 62a. Therefore, there is no transition to the third normal game state while the reservation information relating to the lower operation port 62a remains.

Here, as described above, most of the game balls launched into the game balls to the right route during the first special game state enter the upper variable winning device 64, but some of the game balls enter the upper variable winning device The ball passes through 64 and enters the right working opening 63a. Most of the first special game state that passes through when shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state results in a jackpot result with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, a 6R probability variable jackpot result), to the right side operation ball entry part 63. Although the number of flowing game balls is suppressed, it cannot be denied that the number of reserves related to the right operation port 63a during the first special game state reaches the upper limit of memory due to accidental bias or the like. In addition, in the display portion DR for the right operating port, the larger the number of pending operations related to the right operating port 63a, the shorter the variation display time of the pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, when the pending number is "4", the variable display time is shortened to "1 sec". Therefore, unlike the example shown in FIG. 40, it is impossible to consume all the pending information relating to the lower operating port 62a in one game cycle relating to the right operating port 63a. However, even in such a case, all the pending information related to the lower operation port 62a is digested before shifting to the third normal game state. The grounds for this will be described below with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of reservations related to the lower operation opening 62a reaches the memory upper limit ("4") at the timing of shifting to the second normal game state through the first special game state. In this case, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a are executed for the memory upper limit (four times). In the second normal game state, regardless of the number of reservations related to the lower operation opening 62a, the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the lower operation opening display section DL is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec". ing. Therefore, the time required to execute the above upper limit number of games is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + fixed display time: 0.5 sec) x memory upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

When the number of reservations related to the right operation port 63a reaches the upper limit ("4") at the timing of transition to the second normal game state, the display for the right operation port at the timing of transition to the second normal game state The variable display of the pattern in the part DR is started. The variable display time set for this variable display is "1 sec". Since this holding information corresponds to the special winning result, after the transition to the second normal game state, the fluctuation display time (1 sec) and the fixed display time (1 sec) of the pattern in the right operation port display unit DR have passed. It will shift to the second special game state at the timing. In other words, the number of pending information relating to the lower operating port 62a digested before transitioning to the second special game state is two, and two pending information relating to the lower operating port 62a even after the end of the second special game state. remains.

The time required for the second special game state is "1 sec" which is the sum of the time (0.8 sec) during which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state and the ending time (0.2 sec). However, during this time, neither the game round related to the lower operation port 62a nor the game round related to the right operation port 63a progresses, and at the timing when the second special game state is completed and the second normal game state is restored Thus, the game round related to the lower operating port 62a and the game round related to the right operating port 63a are started at the same time.

Here, even during the second special game state, the main ball entry destination of the game ball launched to the right route is the right operation port 63a. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the right route, the ball enters the right operation port 63a during the second special game state, and the number of reservations related to the right operation port 63a It is possible that the memory limit will be reached again. In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of reservations related to the right operation port 63a during the second special game state has reached the storage upper limit, and after returning to the second normal game state, the display unit DR for the right operation port is executed. The variable display time of the pattern to be displayed becomes "1 sec".

In the game cycle related to the lower activation port 62a, the variable display time is set to be "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of remaining reservations. Therefore, the third and fourth game rounds relating to the lower operating port 62a are completed during the second game round relating to the right operating port 63a. That is, even if the game rounds related to the right operating opening 63a are completed in the shortest time, all the game rounds related to the lower operating opening 62a are completed while the game rounds related to the right operating opening 63a are executed twice. to be digested. And the sum (6 times) of the game times (4 times) related to the lower operation port 62a and the game times (2 times) related to the right operation port 63a is the minimum value of the number of times of time reduction set in the second normal game state Since it is less than (10 times), all the pending information related to the lower operation port 62a will be digested before the number of times of shortening working hours that triggers the transition to the third normal game state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, as long as the game ball is shot to the right route during the second normal game state, all the pending information related to the lower operation port 62a before the transition to the third normal game state It is digested, and at least in the third normal game state, it is possible to proceed with the game only in the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a.

In order to realize such a function, it is possible to set the minimum number of times of time saving to 6 times instead of 10 times.

As described in detail above, although the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is configured to go through the first special game state, the second normal game state to the third normal game state is configured to shift directly, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated at the time of transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be emphasized. With such a configuration, the change can be made easy to understand without excessively increasing the difference in the pattern variation display time between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the variable display time of the pattern due to the configuration in which the progress speed of the game is changed, and secure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the pattern.

If the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 is configured to be openable and closable, the frequency of game ball entry can be increased according to the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the activation port is shortened as the number of storage of the pending information is increased, it is possible to suitably increase the progress speed of the game. Here, the variable display time when the number of storage of pending information reaches the upper limit of storage as a target for shortening the period accompanying the transition from the second normal game state advantageous to the player to the third normal game state more advantageous. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the progress speed of the game under the condition that balls are frequently entered into the right-side operating ball entering portion 63 . Therefore, the effect of raising the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state can be preferably exhibited.

In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the pattern in the display part DR for the right operating port is common, and the variable display time of the pattern is longer or shorter before and after switching the game state than the fixed display time. With a different configuration, the players who pay attention to the pattern can compare the length of the variable display time based on the same reference (common fixed display time). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

It should be noted that by shortening the pattern variation display time for the right actuation opening 63a, which is the main destination of the ball in the third normal game state, the effect of shortening the time can be exhibited favorably. As for the lower operation opening 62a, which is not the main destination of the ball, by making the fluctuation display time of the pattern the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the progress speed of the game can be changed to make the game more exhilarating. can be suppressed from becoming a factor of excessively complicating the pattern display control process.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, by repeating the transition from the third normal game state to the second special game state, an increase in possession balls can be expected. Here, the transition pace to the second special game state depends on the speed at which the game cycle is completed. As described above, in the third normal game state, by raising this digestion speed from the second normal game state, the increasing speed of the held ball can be changed (faster) without excessively complicating the various structures provided in the game area etc. ).

In addition, when the transition to the second special game state occurs frequently in the third normal game state, there is a possibility that the progress of the game will be delayed by securing the execution time of the second special game state. This can be a factor that prevents an increase in the progress speed of the game in the 3 normal game state. Therefore, when the special winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the pattern fluctuation display time is shortened, so that even if the transition to the second special game state is repeated, the game can be performed. The progress speed can be increased to improve the exhilaration of the game.

When the probability variable jackpot results in the first normal game state and shifts to the second normal game state, the number of times of the game rounds that can be executed in the second normal game state is the number of times of time reduction (corresponding to the "reference number of times"). set. When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the set number of time reductions, the game is shifted to the third normal game state. Here, the number of times of time saving is defined so that all the special information relating to the first ball-entering portion can be digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, when the state changes from the second normal game state to the third normal game state without a jackpot result, all the reserved information related to the lower operation port 62a will be consumed during the second normal game state. , carryover to the third normal game state is avoided. In other words, in the third normal game state, the game round progresses based on the hold information related to the right operation port 63a. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of the game cycle related to the lower operation port 62a, it becomes possible to progress the game in the third normal game state with good rhythm. In particular, in the configuration in which the lottery based on the right operating port 63a is preferentially treated over the lottery based on the lower operating port 62a, the reservation information related to the lower operating port 62a should be digested before shifting to the third normal game state. Thus, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's superiority in the third normal game state.

(Entry Validity Period)
As for the right actuating ball entry portion 63 shown in the present embodiment, the entrance portion (right actuating opening 63a) is enlarged in order to increase the frequency of game ball entry. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the width of the right operation opening 63a is set to be more than twice the diameter of the game ball so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the right operation opening 63a at the same time. is also formed to be large. A game ball entered into the right actuation opening 63a is guided to a recovery passage provided behind the game board 60 through a single ball entry passage that is narrowed so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through at the same time. . A detection sensor 391d is disposed in the middle of the ball entry path as a ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the right operation opening 63a. In other words, any game ball entering the right operation opening 63a passes through the detection sensor 391d (specifically, the detection area DE) and heads for the collection passage.

Here, if the right operating port 63a is enlarged to extend the receiving range of the game ball in the right operating port 63a, the game ball flowing into the right operating port 63a will be detected in the detection area due to the above-mentioned passage structure and the like. A certain amount of time lag occurs before passing through the DE. In consideration of such a time lag, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is adjusted to the required time until the game ball that has flowed into the right operation port 63a reaches the detection area DE. The time allowed for reading (receiving) information from is extended (see FIG. 27). In other words, even after the right-side operation ball entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state, the detection of the game ball is valid until the required time elapses, and the game ball entered just before switching to the closed state is included in the detection target. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the privilege is not obtained even though the ball is entered into the right actuation opening 63a, which may reduce the player's desire to play.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the detection sensor 391d away from the right operation opening 63a is not only preferable in terms of regulating so that multiple game balls cannot pass through the detection area DE at once in order to secure the detection accuracy, It is also preferable in suppressing unauthorized access to the detection sensor 391d using, for example.

In the present embodiment, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d for the right actuating opening 63a is used to execute the variable display and fixed display of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS, so that the right actuating ball entering section 63 is One of the features is that the length of the interval time maintained in the closed state is suppressed. Hereinafter, the relationship between the valid time and the pattern display on the through-gate display section DS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a timing chart illustrating the game flow in the low-frequency support mode, and FIG. 43(b) is a timing chart illustrating the gaming machine flow in the high-frequency support mode.

In the low-frequency support mode, the time during which the right-side actuating entrance ball portion 63 is maintained in the open state is "0.08 sec". This open time is a time sufficient for the game ball positioned on the shutter 331 arranged at the closed position to pass through the right operation opening 63a when the game ball falls under its own weight as the shutter 331 is displaced to the open position. is set to The detection sensor 391d is activated at the timing when the right-side actuating ball-entering part 63 is switched to the open state, and is activated for "0.7 sec" even after the right-side actuating ball-entering part 63 is switched to the closed state. maintained.

Here, in the through-gate display section DS, while the right-side operation ball entry section 63 is in the open state, even if the electric work suspension is stored, the variable display of the pattern is not executed. At the timing when the right actuating ball entry part 63 is switched to the closed state, the variable display of the pattern is started. That is, the variable display of the pattern is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is activated.

During the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the pattern on the through-gate display section DS is "0.7 sec", so the fixed display is started at the timing when the valid time has passed.

The fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS is "0.5 sec". In the example of FIG. 43(a), the case where the support lottery is won is illustrated, and the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 switches from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the fixed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-side actuating ball-entering portion 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time during which the closed state is maintained is the time period during which the through-gate display portion DS displays the changing pattern (effective time of the detection sensor 391d). 0.7 sec) and the fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern on the through-gate display section DS (1.2 sec). As described above, the required time (1 sec) for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific area SE1 is shorter than the interval time. That is, during the low-frequency support mode, part of the game balls that have reached the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 pass through the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 and head toward the lower variable winning device 65 .

In this way, the variable display of the through-gate display section DS is preceded during the effective time of the detection sensor 391d. There is a technical significance of prompting the game ball to enter the lower variable winning device 65 side.

On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the time during which the right actuating entry ball 63 is maintained in the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode, extending up to "5.7 sec". The detection sensor 391d is activated at the timing when the right-side actuating ball-entering part 63 is switched to the open state, and is activated for "0.7 sec" even after the right-side actuating ball-entering part 63 is switched to the closed state. maintained. This time is the same as the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the through-gate display section DS, as in the low-frequency support mode, while the right-hand side operation entry section 63 is in the open state, even if the electric service hold is stored, The variable display of the pattern is not executed, and the variable display of the pattern is started at the timing when the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 is switched to the closed state. That is, the variable display of the pattern is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is activated.

During the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS is shortened to "0.2 sec". The fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS is "0.5 sec", and the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (0.7 sec) is the above-mentioned excess of the valid time (0.7 sec). have the same length. In the example of FIG. 43(b), the case where the support lottery is won is illustrated, and the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 switches from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the fixed display time has elapsed. In this manner, when the right-side actuating ball-entering portion 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time during which the closed state is maintained is equal to the pattern fluctuation display time in the through-gate display portion DS and the through-gate display portion DS (0.7 sec), that is, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d exceeds the effective time of the detection sensor 391d.

As described above, the required time (1 sec) for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific area SE1 is longer than the interval time. That is, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have reached the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 enter the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 and are prevented from heading toward the lower variable winning device 65. there is

In the second normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, in order to differentiate it from the third normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, it is configured such that the ball entering the lower variable winning device 65 hardly occurs. there is By avoiding the entry of balls into the lower variable winning device 65 in this manner, the increase in the number of balls held in the second normal game state is suppressed. In this embodiment, by using the effective time of the detection sensor 391d to perform the variable display and fixed display of the pattern of the through gate display section DS, the right side operation entering ball is quickly performed at the timing when the effective time has passed. It is configured such that the portion 63 is switched to an open state. As a result, the interval time during which the right side operating ball entering portion 63 is maintained in the closed state can be suppressed to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1.

As shown in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the right-side actuating ball entry portion 63 is frequently switched to the open state in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is used to It is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game by executing the variable display and fixed display of the pattern of the through-gate display section DS.

When the right side actuating ball-entering portion 63 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the ball-entering effective state is maintained for a predetermined time even after switching to the closed state. As a result, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the right operating port 63a at the same time as switching to the closed state can also be subject to privilege provision. This is preferable in terms of avoiding a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as being unable to obtain benefits that should be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, if the electric service suspension is stored before the right side operation entrance portion 63 is switched to the closed state, the display for the through gate is displayed without waiting for the valid time to elapse. The variable display of the pattern in the part DS is started. In this way, if the variable display of the pattern is started during the effective time and the effective time and the variable display time are at least partially overlapped, the right-side operation entrance ball portion 63 is opened → closed → open. It is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the picture fluctuation display time and the fixed display time of the pattern when the game is rapidly progressed by switching to . This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

By setting the valid time based on the time required for the game ball to move from the right actuation opening 63a to the detection area DE, it is possible to prevent the valid time from being excessively long in order to secure the profit of the player. can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration in terms of suppressing cheating related to the right-side operation ball-entering unit 63 while securing the profit of the player.

In the configuration in which the power reserve is acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 66, the power reserve is necessarily acquired and stored before the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 is switched from the open state to the closed state. However, after switching to the closed state, there may be a case where the electric service hold is acquired→stored. Therefore, after switching to the closed state of the right-side operating ball entrance section 63, when the power reserve is newly obtained during the valid time, the changing display of the pattern on the through-gate display section DS is performed during the valid time. By adopting the structure to start, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game compared to the structure of waiting for the elapse of the effective time to start the variable display of the pattern.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the second normal game state corresponds to the high-probability mode, it can be expected that a big win will be achieved as soon as possible. In spite of the fact that expectations for a jackpot result are increasing, if the game progresses without a jackpot result and the support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode, the player's game It is feared that motivation will drop markedly. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the number of games reaches the reference number of times without winning the winning result in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the reference number of times Triggered by the arrival, the state shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and the game can be advanced more advantageously by upgrading to the third normal game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by trying to help the player.

Specifically, in the third normal game state, the number of game balls that pass through the right actuation port 63a increases due to the decrease in the frequency of opening the right actuation port 63a, and the number of game balls that pass through the right actuation port 63a increases. , most of which enter the lower prize-winning hole 341 . In other words, although the winning probability of the winning ball unit 70 as a whole does not change, the details of the winning destinations change, and the number of winnings to the lower prize winning opening 341 increases. The lower prize winning opening 341 is preferentially treated so that the number of prize balls is larger than that of the right operation opening 63a, and as a result, the benefits (prize balls) obtained by the same investment are more than in the second normal game state. becomes. Specifically, as described above, in the second normal game state, the number of possessed balls gradually decreases as the game progresses, while in the third normal game state, the number of possessed balls gradually increases as the game progresses. The third normal game state is continued at least until the next big win results, and becomes a chance to increase the possession balls.

In addition, in the third normal game state, compared to the second normal game state, the time required for the game cycle is slightly shorter, and even if the intervention of the second special game state continues. The occurrence of inconvenience such as slowing down of game progress is suppressed.

In addition, in the third normal game state, the opening of the lower special winning opening 341 is triggered by the entry of the ball into the right operating opening 63a. Here, although the winning probability to the right operating port 63a is lowered as compared with the second normal game state, the decrease in the winning probability is suppressed to the extent that the reservation information related to the right operating port 63a can be sufficiently acquired. there is That is, the inconvenience that the opening frequency of the lower special winning opening 341 is lowered due to the lowering of the winning probability of the right operation opening 63a is suppressed.

When a jackpot result occurs during the third normal game state, most of them (excluding the 2R normal jackpot result and the 16R probability variable jackpot result) will shift to the second normal game state, and the relief function described above is excessive. is avoided. However, even if it is demoted from the third normal game state, if the transition destination becomes the second normal game state, it is possible to shift to the third normal game state again, so by demotion from the third normal game state It is possible to suppress a sudden drop in the player's willingness to play.

During the third game state, the right route is favorably treated so as to be advantageous to the player as compared to the left route, so it is assumed that the game balls are mainly launched to the right route. The game ball shot to the right route is avoided from entering the lower operating port 62a and enters the right operating port 63a. Here, the number of time reductions set when a big hit result is obtained in the game round related to the right operation port 63a is compared to the number of time reductions set when a big hit result is achieved in the game round related to the lower operation port 62a. are overemphasized so that they are generally less. Therefore, when a jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, although it is demoted to the second normal game state with that as a trigger, preferential treatment is given so that the number of times of time reduction to be reset is relatively small. there is As a result, the hurdle for activating the relief function is lower in the second normal game state shifted from the third normal game state than in the second normal game state shifted from the first normal game state. This is a device for alleviating the decline in the player's willingness to play when the third normal game state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the third normal game state, the state is shifted to the first normal game state, and 50 times are set as the number of times of time reduction, and in the third normal game state. When the 2R probability variable jackpot result is obtained, the state is shifted to the second normal game state, and 50 times are similarly set as the number of times of time saving. In each of these normal game states, the display effects on the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29, and the like are shared, and it is possible to identify which normal game state it is from the appearance. is difficult. For this reason, it becomes unclear whether to be promoted to the third normal game state or to be demoted to the first normal game state until the set number of times of time saving is consumed. Thus, even if the same number of times of time saving is set, the game state after the number of times of time saving is divided into advantageous side/disadvantage side depending on the game state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and attracting attention to the game. can contribute to improvement.

As described above, in the configuration in which the game state can be changed to the advantageous side/disadvantageous side by the number of times of saving time, the player's attention is likely to turn to the remaining number of times until the number of times of saving time is consumed. In this way, if the number of balls held is greatly reduced in a situation where the attention to the game is increasing, it is assumed that the increase in the attention to the game will easily lead to a decrease in the desire to play. be. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, both the fourth normal game state that shifts with the 2R normal jackpot result and the second normal game state that shifts with the 2R probability variable jackpot result as a trigger correspond to the high frequency support mode. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such an inconvenience by reducing the loss of the ball held.

In addition, in a configuration in which the game state changes due to the number of times of time saving, there is a concern that the progress of the game will be slowed down in the process, which will reduce the impact and hinder the effect of increasing the attention to the game. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, such concerns can be dispelled favorably by smoothing the progress of the game until the time-saving number of times is consumed by shortening the variable display time or the like.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the game state is divided into the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side by the number of time reductions, it is possible to expect an improvement in the degree of attention to the game, but on the other hand, the player's fatigue is reduced due to the delay in the time until the number of times of reduction. worried about increasing. In this respect, the smooth progress of the game by the above-described configuration is advantageous in reducing the fatigue of the player by suppressing the delay of the game round and shortening the process until the number of times of time saving is completed. Moreover, it is also preferable to set the number of times of shortening of time when branching occurs to some extent.

When the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are compared, the former corresponds to the high probability mode, while the latter corresponds to the low probability mode. Therefore, as described above, even if it is difficult to identify which game state the display effects are in common with, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of the game by providing a difference in the chances of winning a big win during the game state. can.

As described above, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via the first special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit (time reduction number of times) As a result, the game shifts to the third normal game state which is more advantageous to the player. The upper limit includes "100 times", "70 times", "50 times", "30 times", and "10 times", and depending on which upper limit is set, there is a difference in the transition hurdles to the third normal game state. occurs. That is, a second normal game state in which it is easy to shift to the third normal game state and a second normal game state in which it is difficult to shift to the third normal game state occur. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal game state, the monotony of the game in the normal game state is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game is improved. can contribute.

In order to enhance the sharpness of the game while suppressing the excessive bias of the advantage, it is preferable to increase the set upper limit to some extent to suppress the probability of reaching the upper limit. On the other hand, however, if the upper limit is too large, the game will be delayed until reaching the upper limit, or the impression that it is practically impossible to reach the upper limit will be strong. There is a concern that the effect of aiming for In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the lottery mode in the second normal game state is specified to be the high probability mode, even if the upper limit is lowered, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of reaching the upper limit. The occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably suppressed.

The shift (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long period of time, it becomes a factor that increases the player's fatigue. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the upper limit is set to the number of games executed based on the ball entering the right operation opening 63a, and the ball can be easily entered into the right operation opening 63a in the second normal game state. By setting it as the structure which becomes, a game can be progressed rapidly. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be improved, and the fatigue resulting therefrom can be alleviated.

In addition, the game can be progressed quickly by adopting a configuration in which the symbol variation display time is shortened in the second normal game state as compared to the first normal game state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be improved, and the fatigue resulting therefrom can be alleviated.

In particular, when combined with the high-frequency support mode, it is expected that the upper limit will be reached by adopting a configuration in which the variation display time is shortened in conjunction with the increase in the frequency of ball entry into the right operation opening 63a. A game can be smoothly progressed in the second normal game state. As a result, the effect of relieving fatigue described above can be exhibited more favorably.

Transition to the first special game state in the fourth normal game state It is realistic to reach the upper limit when the second normal game state is reached for the player who has experienced the number of time reductions without winning the lottery. It can give the impression that it is With such a configuration, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game will be improved when the game is shifted to the second normal game state.

When a jackpot result is obtained during the second normal game state, the state is shifted to the first special game state, and after the first special game state is finished, the state is returned to the second normal game state, or to the fourth normal game state. There will be a branch with a case of migration (demotion). Thereby, the monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed. Also, even if a big win results while the game is being played aiming at the upper limit in the second normal game state, there is a possibility of returning to the second normal game state again. In the case of returning to the second normal game state, the upper limit is newly set, so that it is possible to re-challenge to shift to the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the willingness to play due to the transition to the first special game state.

Regarding the transition condition for shifting from the second normal game state to the most advantageous third normal game state, it is relaxed when the second normal game state returns to the second normal game state through the special game state with a big hit result. There is something. If the hurdles to the third normal game state are lowered when the second normal game state is looped in this way, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by using a plurality of normal game states together is preferably exhibited. be able to.

As shown in the present embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the jackpot result is the trigger for the transition (demotion) from the second normal game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state The game is played in anticipation that the result will not be a big win. Here, in the case of a big hit result, while the game can be demoted to the first normal game state, the second normal game state may be restored and the transition condition to the third normal game state may be relaxed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a rapid decrease in the player's willingness to play when a big win results in the second normal game state.

In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the hurdle to the third normal game state is not necessarily lowered, but may be raised to give a sense of tension to the game. can be done.

In the structure of stepping up in the order of the first normal game state→the second normal game state→the third normal game state, even though the state is shifted to the second normal game state, the jackpot result is obtained and the third normal game state is entered. If the transition of the second normal game state occurs frequently, the impression is likely to be that the game in the second normal game state has been slowed down. This can be a hindrance in trying to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, when a big win result is obtained during the second normal game state, the ratio of hurdle reduction is set higher than the ratio of hurdle raise, thereby making a plurality of normal game states. can be used together, the step-up of the game state can be made light.

When the game ball is shot to the left route in the first normal game state, a jackpot lottery is executed based on the entry of the ball into the lower operation port 62a. When this lottery results in a big hit and shifts to the second normal game state, a relatively difficult transition condition (time reduction number of times) is likely to be set. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal game state, the main destination of the game ball becomes the right operation opening 63a by shooting the game ball to the right route. A jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, resulting in a jackpot, and when returning to the second normal game state through the first special game state, a relatively easy transition condition ( number of working hours) is easier to set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably implement the various technical ideas described above while avoiding complication of the configuration and the like by using the existing configuration of the gaming machine.

In the ball entry unit 70 shown in the present embodiment, the required time required for the game ball flowing down the right route to pass over the shutter 331 (first specific area SE1) of the right operation ball entry portion 63 is high frequency support. It is longer than the sum of the fluctuation display time and the fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS in the mode. Therefore, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have reached the ball entering unit 70 (right side operating ball entering portion 63) enter the right operating port 63a. In other words, the game ball launched to the right route during the high-frequency support mode flows into the right actuation opening 63a and entry into the lower special winning opening 341 is suppressed. On the other hand, the required time is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and fixed display time in the low frequency support mode. For this reason, during the low frequency support mode, even if the right side operating ball entering portion 63 is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls reaching the shutter 331 pass through the right side operating ball entering portion 63 and go down. Go to the big prize gate 341. In this way, during the high-frequency support mode, the number of balls entering the lower special prize-winning opening 341 is suppressed, while during the low-frequency support mode, the number of balls entering the lower special prize-winning opening 341 increases, thereby improving the progress of the game. It can make a clear difference.

Here, in order to reduce the number of game balls (drops) that pass through the right operation port 63a and go to the lower prize winning port 341 during the low frequency support mode in order to differentiate each support mode, the above-mentioned variable display time and fixed display Shorten the time. However, if those times are simply shortened, shooting/stopping will be performed according to the results displayed on the through-gate display section DS (progressing the game with even a slight advantage to the player). becomes difficult, and the significance of providing the through-gate display section DS is diminished. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the variable display time and fixed display time in the through-gate display section DS while suppressing the above-described leakage. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

In the configuration in which the ball entering the lower special prize opening 341 is treated more favorably than the ball entering the right operation opening 63a, it is assumed that the player expects the ball to enter the lower special prize opening 341 during the game. be done. In such a configuration, it is not preferable for the ball to enter the lower special prize opening 341 excessively, because this causes the balance of the game to be disturbed. In this regard, while minimizing the time during which the right side operating ball entering portion 63 is in the receiving state, movement of the game ball toward the lower special winning opening 341 can be avoided, so the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed. . And shortening the time to be in the receiving state is advantageous in prompting the player's expectations as if the game balls were flowing down toward the lower prize winning opening 341, and the time to be in the receiving state is lengthened. It is possible to suitably suppress the reduction in the expectation of the ball entering the lower special prize opening 341. - 特許庁

The lower variable winning device 65 is opened by making the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 connecting the right operating ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 shorter than the passage length related to the first specific region SE1. It is easy to give the impression to the player that if the game ball that reaches the right-side operating ball-entering part 63 can pass through the right-side operating ball-entering part 63 under the condition that the player is in a state where the ball is in the right-side operation ball entering part 63, the ball can enter the first ball-entering part immediately. It can contribute to the improvement of attention to the behavior of the game ball reaching the shutter 331 of the ball entering portion 63 and the right side operating ball entering portion 63 .

Since most of the game balls that have flowed into the ball entering unit 70 can enter either the right operating opening 63a or the lower large winning opening 341, the combination of the right operating opening 63a and the lower large winning opening 341 results in one large winning ball. You can make it look like the department is built. Making it appear as if the ball entry opportunity for the game ball is secured by the large ball entry portion is advantageous in improving the player's sense of satisfaction. Here, by making the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 shorter than the passage length of the passage portions (the specific regions SE1 and SE2) formed by the respective shutters, both ball entrance portions (the right operation opening 63a and the lower large The sense of unity of the winning opening 341) can be strengthened. Thereby, the above impression can be strengthened.

In this type of large ball entry section, when the main ball entry destination is switched between the right operation opening 63a and the lower special prize opening 341 depending on the situation, the ball should not enter the lower special prize opening 341. The possibility that the game hall suffers a disadvantage increases due to the entry of the ball into the lower prize winning opening 341. In consideration of such circumstances, a communication passage (intermediate passage portion 323) is provided between the lower special winning opening 341 and the right operating opening 63a to delay the movement of the game ball toward the lower special winning opening 341. There is a technical significance in thinning out. If the intermediate passage portion 323 is lengthened to a certain extent, these functions can be preferably exhibited, but on the other hand, the sense of unity between both ball-entering portions (the right operation opening 63a and the lower special winning opening 341) is reduced. There is concern that the impression that it is a large ball entry part will fade. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the shutters of both the ball-entering portions (the right operating port 63a and the lower special winning port 341) are tilted downward to the left, and the intermediate passage portion 323 is in a direction intersecting the tilting direction. As a configuration that extends to the right, the positions of the ball entry portions (right operation port 63a and lower special prize opening 341) are offset vertically, thereby increasing the passage length of the intermediate passage portion 323 while both ball entry portions (right operation It is possible to reduce the decrease in the sense of unity between the opening 63a and the lower prize winning opening 341).

A game ball that has flowed into the discharge passage provided in the middle of the intermediate passage portion 323 is discharged from the game area PE as it is, and is prevented from reaching the lower special winning opening 341 . In this way, a part of the game ball that has passed through the right side operating ball entry part 63 is discharged from the game area PE without flowing into the lower big winning opening 341, so that the game that has flowed into the intermediate passage part 323 Compared to the configuration in which the ball heads toward the out port 68, the impression of the above-described one large ball-entering portion can be enhanced.

In the configuration in which the lower large winning opening 341 is treated more favorably than the right operating opening 63a to the player, it is expected that the game ball passes through the right operating opening 63a and heads for the lower large winning opening 341. Then, the shooting operation is executed, and it is assumed that the player's attention is likely to be directed to the movement of the game ball from the right operation opening 63a to the intermediate passage portion 323. Here, in a configuration in which the passage portion (the first specific region SE1) formed by the shutter 331 is provided with the deceleration portion (the ridge portions 335a and 336a) to extend the required passage time, the deceleration portion is placed on the intermediate passage portion 323 side. By arranging it so as to deviate from the direction, it is possible to make it easy to follow the movement of the game ball with the eyes at a place where the player's attention tends to be directed. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the further attention degree.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them.

(1) In the above embodiment, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, the number of held balls decreases (slightly decreases) as the game progresses. By changing this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of held balls increases as the game progresses even in the second normal game state. However, in order to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the second normal game state and the third normal game state so that the latter is more advantageous, for example, the increasing speed of the ball in the second normal game state is the third normal game state. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the increasing speed of the held ball is suppressed to be lower than that in the normal game state.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when the time saving ends without a big hit result despite shifting to the high probability mode, the third normal game is further advantageous to the player, including the meaning of relief. It is configured to shift to the state. In view of such a relief function, it is sufficient that the third normal game state is at least more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rate of decrease in is slow. It should be noted that, as shown in the modified example (1) described above, when using a configuration in which the number of possession balls increases even in the second normal game state, the increase speed of possession balls in the third normal game state is the second normal game It may be configured to be lower than the state.

(3) In the above embodiment, for example, when the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is reached, the high probability mode and low frequency support mode correspondence are performed without going through the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode. Although it is configured to shift to the third normal game state, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is necessary to go through the second normal game state in order to shift to the third normal game state regardless of the jackpot result.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the number of times of time reduction functioning as a hurdle for shifting to the third normal game state, that is, the number of games in which the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode, is varied depending on the type of jackpot result. , It is also possible to make the number of time reduction times constant regardless of the type of jackpot result. For example, in any of the 2R probability variable jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot result, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result, the number of games to be maintained in the high-frequency support mode should be unified to be N times. When making such a change, it is preferable to unify the number of games to be maintained in the high-frequency support mode when shifting to the fourth normal game state through the 2R normal jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot result is obtained during the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode, the game can be shifted to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode. That is, the configuration is such that the third normal game state can be ended with the result of the jackpot as a trigger. In addition to or instead of this, it may be configured to shift to the low probability mode when the number of games executed after shifting to the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, M times). In this case, by increasing the number of games in which the high-probability mode is maintained more than the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is maintained (the number of times of time reduction), the third normal game state with the number limit is passed through the second normal game state. It is possible to realize a configuration that shifts to

(6) In the above-described embodiment, based on the winning to the lower operation port 62a and the winning to the right operation port 63a and the range of the number of times of time reduction set when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained based on the winning result The range of the number of time-savings set in each case is set to be “0” to “100” times, and the distribution of the number of times of time-saving is differentiated so that the latter is less than the former. By doing so, the superiority of the right operating port 63a over the lower operating port 62a is ensured. In the second special game state, when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained and the transition is made to the second special game state again, it is expected that the transition hurdle to the third normal game state will be lower than before the probability variable jackpot result, that is, the third. In order to increase the expectation that the number of games required to shift to the normal game state will be reduced, the maximum value of the number of times of time reduction set when the result of the probability variable jackpot results based on the winning prize to the right operation port 63a is lowered. It may be configured so as to be less than the maximum value of the number of times of time saving set when a probability variable jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the mouth 62a. It should be noted that, in the case of a probability variable jackpot result based on winning a prize to the right operation port 63a, the number of times of time reduction is "0", that is, the transition to the third normal game state may be determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times of time saving is not shortened in a part of the case where the probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state, but when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of times of time saving is reduced in all. For example, the first time-saving number of times (for example, 50 times) set when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a is the probability variable jackpot result based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a. You may prescribe|regulate so that it may become more than the 2nd number of times of time reduction (for example, 30 times) set when it is. In addition, in order to make it appear as if the number of time reductions remaining at the time of the probability variable jackpot result in the second normal game state was shortened when returning to the second normal game state, it is based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a. It is also possible to set the number of times of time reduction to be set to "0" times when the probability variable jackpot result is obtained.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the third normal game state is configured so that the pattern fluctuation display time in the right operating opening display portion DR is shorter than that in the second normal game state. Although the game progresses smoothly in the normal game state, it is not limited to this. The pattern fluctuation display time in the display part DR for the right operating port is longer in the third normal game state than in the second normal game state, or the second normal game state and the third normal game state are combined. It is also possible to configure so that the fluctuation display time of the pattern on the right operating port display portion DR has the same length.

(8) The number of time reductions set when the 2R normal jackpot results in the second normal game state and the number of time reductions set when the 2R variable variable jackpot results are both "50" times. In this case, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 and the speaker unit 29 are displayed in the game state in both cases of returning to the second normal game state through the special game state and shifting to the fourth normal game state (demotion). It may be configured such that it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state by using the same effect or the like to suggest. If the game state is hidden in this way, when the number of times of time saving becomes "0", it is shifted (promoted) to the third normal game state which is more advantageous than the second normal game state (promotion), or the second normal game state. A branch will occur as to whether to shift (downgrade) to the first normal game state which is more disadvantageous than the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the tension when the number of times of time saving set at the time of transition to the game state is consumed.

(9) In the above embodiment, the result of the lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed on the through gate display section DS of the main display unit 81. However, it is not limited to this. do not have. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the result of the lottery based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed on another display unit such as the display screen 75a of the pattern display device 75. FIG.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 are arranged on the right route upstream of the right-side operating ball entry portion 63, but this is not the only option. It is also possible to dispose the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 on the right route downstream of the right operating ball entering portion 63 .

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the pattern confirmation display time on the lower operation port display portion DL is shorter than the pattern confirmation display time on the right operation port display portion DR, but the present invention is limited to this. not to be For example, the pattern confirmation display time on the right operation port display portion DR may be shorter than the pattern confirmation display time on the lower operation port display portion DL. A configuration may be adopted in which the fixed display time of the pattern in the operation port display section DL is uniformed.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in any normal game state, the pattern fixed display time in the display portion DL for the lower operation port and the display portion DR for the right operation port is not changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the fixed display time of the display portion DL for the lower operation port and the display portion DR for the right operation port are changed according to the type. For example, the confirmation display time may be shortened in the order of the first normal game state→second normal game state→third normal game state.

(12) In the above embodiment, the lower variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened in the second special game state, and the right side operation ball is placed on the flow path (right route) toward the lower variable winning device 65. Although the portion 63 is provided, it is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to dispose a configuration corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 on the flow path toward the right-side operating ball entering portion 63 .

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the protrusions 335a and 336a are provided as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 of the right-side operation ball entry portion 63. The specific configuration for earning the time required for the process is arbitrary. For example, unevenness may be provided at the upper limit of the shutter 331 so that the flow path meanders up and down.

In addition, although the protrusions 335a and 336a are biased toward the downstream portion (intermediate passage portion 323 side) of the upstream passage portion 322, the protrusions 335a and 336a are arranged in the upstream portion and the midstream portion of the upstream passage portion 322. can also be placed in

(14) In the above embodiment, the right actuating ball-entering part 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 are arranged with a vertical shift, and the ball passage in the ball-entering unit 70 is cranked up and down. It is also possible to arrange the operating ball entry part 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 in a row.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, the intermediate passage portion 323 as the "communication passage portion" is branched at an intermediate position, and part of the game balls passing through the intermediate passage portion 323 enter the lower variable winning device 65. Although it is configured to be discharged from the game area PE without being guided, it is not necessary to form the above-described branch in the intermediate passage portion 323 .

Also, the game balls flowing out from the middle position of the ball passage through the intermediate passage portion 323 are discharged from the game area PE without passing through the out port 68, but the game balls are guided to the out port 68. Good configuration.

(16) Although the right-side actuation ball entry portion 63 shown in the above embodiment is configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding the shutter 331 in the front-rear direction, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may slide horizontally or vertically to switch between the open state and the closed state. It should be noted that the shutter 331 does not necessarily have to be of a sliding type and may be of a rotating type.

Similarly, the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65 slides in the front-rear direction to switch between the open state and the closed state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may slide horizontally or vertically to switch between the open state and the closed state. It should be noted that the shutter 345 does not necessarily have to be of a sliding type and may be of a rotating type.

In addition, the upper variable winning device 64 shown in the above embodiment has a configuration in which the shutter 315 rotates in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60 to switch between the open state and the closed state, but it is limited to this. is not. For example, the shutter may be configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by rotating in a direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. It should be noted that the shutter 315 does not necessarily have to be of a rotating type and may be of a sliding type.

(17) In the above-described embodiment, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 of the right-side operation ball-entering unit 63 is determined from the interval time during which the shutter 331 is kept closed in the high-frequency support mode. is longer than the interval time during which the shutter 331 is kept closed in the low-frequency support mode, but the predetermined time may be changed arbitrarily.

(18) In the above embodiment, the transition to the high-probability mode is determined by entering the advantageous ball entry section 314 provided in the upper variable winning device 64, but the advantageous ball entry section 314 is omitted. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the transition to the high-probability mode is determined when a probability-variable jackpot results.

(19) In the above embodiment, the lottery based on the entry of the ball into the lower working opening 62a is configured not to result in a special win. may also be configured to result in a special winning result.

(20) In the above-described embodiment, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to display the number of remaining time-savings, that is, the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal game state. The remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 75a does not necessarily have to match the remaining number of times of saving time, and may indicate the number of times of remaining time saving.

In this case, for example, it is difficult to identify from the display which of "100 times", "70 times", "50 times", "30 times", and "10 times" is set as the number of times of time saving. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved. When such a display is performed, for example, when the number of times the game has been executed reaches "10 times", "30 times", "50 times", or "70 times", the game state is shifted to the third normal game state. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the game during the second normal game state by executing the display performance to the effect that there is a possibility.

For example, if "100 times" is displayed as a display corresponding to the number of times of time saving in the second normal game state where the number of times of time saving is "50 times", the actual number of times of time saving is "10 times", "30 times", " 50 times", "70 times", or "100 times". In this case, for the corresponding display, for example, after the number of executed games reaches a specific number, the number of times to be subtracted in one game is increased, and when the time is reduced, "0 times" is displayed as the display. is also possible.

(21) In the above-described embodiment, a difference is provided in the variable display time between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state when the number of holds is "3" or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. . It is also possible to share the variable display time even when the number of reservations is "3" or more.

(22) When a jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state, if the newly set number of times of time saving is smaller than the remaining number of times of time saving, the player is notified to that effect. It is preferable to have a configuration that clearly indicates that the third normal game state is approaching.

(23) In the above embodiment, the combination of the support mode and the lottery mode is used to differentiate the first to third normal game states, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding each normal game state, if a difference that is advantageous to the player is ensured in the order of the first normal game state <second normal game state<third normal game state, the specific configuration is arbitrary. . For example, as a lottery mode, a medium probability mode is provided in which the probability of winning results is higher than in the low probability mode and the probability of winning results is lower than in the high probability mode, and the first normal game state is the low probability mode and the second normal game. Differentiation may be achieved by making the state correspond to the middle probability mode and the third normal game state to the high probability mode. Even in this case, when the standard number of game rounds have passed without a big hit result despite the shift to the middle probability mode, the state is shifted to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode. , it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. In the case of such a configuration, it is arbitrary whether each normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode as long as the above-mentioned advantageous and disadvantageous relationships can be secured. .

(24) In the above embodiment, the pattern confirmation display time on the lower operation port display portion DL is shorter than the pattern confirmation display time on the right operation port display portion DR, but the present invention is not limited to this. . It is also possible to make the final display time of the pattern on the display portion for the lower operating port DL longer than the time to finalize and display the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port. Further, it is also possible to set the fixed display time of the pattern on the display portion DL for the lower operating port to the same length as the time of fixed display of the pattern on the display portion DR for the right operating port.

(25) In the above embodiment, the fixed display time of the pattern in the display portion DL for the lower operation port is defined to be the same in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, the difference may be provided so that the fixed display time in the first normal game state<the fixed display time in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state<the fixed display time in the third normal game state.

In addition, it is not always necessary to unify the fixed display time of the pattern in the display portion DR for the right operating port in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Fixed display time in 2 normal game state and 4th normal game state <
A difference may be provided so as to be the fixed display time in the third normal game state.

The difference may be provided for both the fixed display time related to the display portion for the lower operating port DL and the fixed display time related to the display portion for the right operating port DR, or may be provided for only one of them.

(26) In the above embodiment, in consideration of the variable display time and fixed display time of the pattern in the display portion DL for the lower operation port and the display portion DR for the right operation port, the lower operation port 62a is displayed during the second normal game state. Although the minimum number of time reductions in the second normal game state is defined so that all the pending information is digested, it is not limited to this. If all the game rounds (not including additional minutes) related to the lower operating port 62a can be digested during one game round relating to the right operating port 63a, the minimum number of times of time saving is the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a It is also possible to set the number to be one more than the upper limit of .

(27) In the above-described embodiment, the number of times of time saving is subtracted regardless of which of the game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a and the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a are executed in the second normal game state. However, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of times of time saving is subtracted only when the game round related to the right operation port 63a is executed.

(28) Regarding FIG. 31 in the above embodiment, the variable display time in the case of a special hit result or a missing result (more specifically, a complete missing result that does not correspond to reach display) is shown, but for example, the second normal game state ~ In the fourth normal game state, it is also possible to unify the fluctuation display time when the result is a big win.

(29) In the above embodiment, the game round related to the right operating opening display portion DR is the special winning result and the game round related to the lower operating opening display portion DL is the losing result, and each display In the case where the variable display of the pattern is performed in parallel in the lower operating port display unit DL, the variable display of the pattern in the lower operating port display unit DL is compulsorily performed at the timing when the fixed display of the pattern in the right operating port display unit DR is performed. is terminated at In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to make the variable display time of the display portion DL for the lower operating port in the second normal game state shorter than the variable display time of the display portion DR for the right operating port. At least the time saving number of times set in the second normal game state is reached, and until the transition to the third normal game state, the reservation information related to the lower operation port display part DL is all digested. For example, the variable display time of the display portion for the lower operating port DL may be longer than the variable display time of the display portion for the right operating port DR, or may be the same length as the variable display time of the display portion for the right operating port DR. good too.

(30) In the above-described embodiment, when the detection sensor 391d attached to the right-side operating ball-entering portion 63 is valid, information from the detection sensor 391d is read by the main controller 162, and during the valid time, If there is no such information, the information is not read by the main controller 162, but it is not limited to this. The sensor is read regardless of whether it is within the valid time or not, and if it is during the valid time, a privilege is given based on the detection of the ball entering, and if it is not during the valid time. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a privilege is not given even when a ball entry is detected.

(31) In the above embodiment, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the sum of the fluctuation display time and the fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS exceeds the effective time of the detection sensor 391. However, it is also possible to set the sum of the fluctuation display time and the fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS to be longer than the effective time of the detection sensor 391. be.

(32) In the above embodiment, the upper variable winning device 64 opened in the first special game state reduces the number of balls entering the right operation opening 63a during the first special game state. In order to strengthen such a function, the through gate 66 should also be arranged downstream of the upper variable winning device 64 .

(33) In the above embodiment, when shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, all the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a stored at the beginning of the transition to the second normal game state. Although configured to be digested, it is not limited to this. If it is possible to reduce the reservation information related to the lower operation opening 62a before the transition to the third special game state, the specific configuration is optional.

(34) In the above-described embodiment, the game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a and the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a are simultaneously progressed, but it is not always necessary to progress each game cycle simultaneously. For example, the game rounds to be executed in the order of acquisition of the hold information may be switched between the game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a and the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a. In addition, the game round related to the right operating port 63a is executed with priority over the game round related to the lower operating port 62a. It is good also as a structure which switches by times.

(35) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the pachinko machine and the slot machine are provided with a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated to start rotation of the reels. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Characteristic configurations extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
The following feature group A is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. Special information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by MPU 602 of main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (ball entry into operation opening 62a) is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (first normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high A second normal game state corresponding to probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (third normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state game state) is provided,
Second normal game state transition means for shifting the game state to the second normal game state with the end of the special game state (MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes processing for transition to the second normal game state function) and
When shifting to the second normal game state by the second normal game state transition means, upper limit setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of games in the second normal game state (number of times of time reduction) (MPU 602 of main control device 162 function to set the number of working hours) and
When a first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the game state is changed from the second normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the first upper limit. When the transition to the third normal game state is made and a second upper limit larger than the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the number of games played in the second normal game state is the second upper limit. Third normal game state transition means for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on reaching A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute processing for.

According to the feature A1, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the player It shifts to the 3rd normal game state advantageous to . The upper limit includes a first upper limit and a second upper limit, and there is a difference in the transition hurdles to the third normal game state between when the first upper limit is set and when the second upper limit is set. That is, a second normal game state in which transition to the third normal game state is likely to occur, and a second normal game state in which transition to the third normal game state is difficult to occur. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal game state, the monotony of the game in the normal game state is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game is improved. can contribute.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board on which a game area is formed, and special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section provided in the game area. an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by said special information acquisition means; and determining whether or not the special information stored in said acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information. means for sequentially performing determination; pattern display means having a display section and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section; Based on the determination, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game cycle. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; When a determination result corresponding to the information is obtained and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game cycle control means, the game state is shifted to a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state transition means is provided, and the normal game state includes a first normal game state, a second normal game state more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a further state than the second normal game state. A third normal game state advantageous to the player is provided, and means for switching the game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state and the third normal game state according to the game situation. A gaming machine characterized by comprising

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute acquisition processing) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (first normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high A second normal game state corresponding to probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (third normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state game state) is provided,
Second normal game state transition means for shifting the game state to the second normal game state with the end of the special game state (MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes processing for transition to the second normal game state function) and
When shifting to the second normal game state by the second normal game state transition means, upper limit setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of games in the second normal game state (number of times of time reduction) (MPU 602 of main control device 162 function to set the number of working hours) and
When a first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the game state is changed from the second normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the first upper limit. When the transition to the third normal game state is made and a second upper limit larger than the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the number of games played in the second normal game state is the second upper limit. Third normal game state transition means for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on reaching A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute processing for.

According to the feature A2, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via the special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the player is further It shifts to the 3rd normal game state advantageous to . The upper limit includes a first upper limit and a second upper limit, and there is a difference in the transition hurdles to the third normal game state between when the first upper limit is set and when the second upper limit is set. That is, a second normal game state in which transition to the third normal game state is likely to occur, and a second normal game state in which transition to the third normal game state is difficult to occur. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal game state, the monotony of the game in the normal game state is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game is improved. can contribute.

Feature A3. A variable ball entry unit (upper variable winning device 64) capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which no ball can enter;
An opening/closing control means (a function of executing opening/closing processing by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that switches the variable ball entry portion between the closed state and the open state when the special game state is established,
The opening/closing control means, when shifting to the second normal game state corresponding to the second upper limit through the special game state, sets the opening/closing state of the variable ball entry portion in the special game state to a predetermined state, It is characterized by having means for setting the opening/closing mode of the variable ball entry portion in the special game state to the predetermined mode when shifting to the second normal game state corresponding to the first upper limit through the game state. The gaming machine according to feature A2.

As shown in the feature A1 and the like, according to the configuration in which the transition hurdles to the third normal game state are different, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game. However, if it becomes possible to specify the hurdle from the opening/closing mode (behavior) of the variable ball entry part in the special game state before the transition to the second normal game state, the degree of attention to the game in the second normal game state There is concern that the In this regard, as shown in this feature, the opening/closing mode of the variable ball entry portion is set to be the same regardless of whether the first upper limit or the second upper limit is set. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the upper limit is specified in advance.

Feature A4. The second normal game state is a game state (normal game corresponding to high probability mode) that is more likely to result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information than the first normal game state when the determination is performed by the determination means. state), the gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3.

In order to enhance the sharpness of the game while suppressing the excessive bias of the advantage, it is preferable to increase the set upper limit to some extent to suppress the probability of reaching the upper limit. On the other hand, however, if the upper limit is too large, the game will be delayed until reaching the upper limit, or the impression that it is practically impossible to reach the upper limit will be strong. There is a concern that the effect of aiming for In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the game state (high probability mode) is set so that the result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is likely to occur, frequent occurrence of reaching the upper limit can be suppressed even if the upper limit is lowered. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned various inconveniences.

Feature A5. Any one of features A2 to A4, characterized in that the second normal game state is a game state in which a ball is easier to enter the starting ball entry portion than the first normal game state. game machine.

The shift (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long period of time, it becomes a factor that increases the player's fatigue. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the upper limit is set for the number of games executed based on the ball entering the starting ball entering part, and the ball entering the starting ball entering part is easy in the second normal game state. By setting it as the structure which becomes, a game can be progressed rapidly. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be improved, and the fatigue resulting therefrom can be alleviated.

Feature A6. Characteristic A2 characterized in that the second normal game state is a game state configured such that a variable display period (variable display time) of the pattern for each game round is shorter than that in the first normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5.

The shift (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, and if such tension continues for an excessively long period of time, it becomes a factor that increases the player's fatigue. Therefore, in the second normal game state, the upper limit is set for the game rounds executed based on the ball entering the starting ball entry part, and the pattern is more variable in the second normal game state than in the first normal game state. By adopting a configuration in which the display period is shortened, the game can be progressed quickly. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be improved, and the fatigue resulting therefrom can be alleviated.

In particular, in combination with feature A5, the frequency of entering the starting ball entering section is increased, and the variable display period is shortened. A game in a game state can be smoothly progressed. As a result, the effect of relieving fatigue described above can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature A7. As the normal game state, a fourth normal game state (low probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal game state and the third normal game state And a fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode) is provided,
4th normal game state transition means for transitioning to the 4th normal game state through the special game state (function to shift to the 4th normal game state triggered by the normal jackpot result in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When the number of games in the fourth normal game state reaches a specified number of times (for example, 50 times), the first normal game state transition means for shifting to the first normal game state (MPU 602 of main controller 162 high frequency Equipped with a function to shift to the first normal game state after the end of the support mode),
The upper limit setting means according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein at least one of the first upper limit and the second upper limit is smaller than the specified number of times. game machine.

Transition to the special game state in the fourth normal game state It is realistic for the player who has reached the specified number of times without winning the lottery to reach the upper limit when the second normal game state is entered. You can give the impression that there is With such a configuration, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game will be improved when the game is shifted to the second normal game state.

Feature A8. As the normal game state, a fourth normal game state (low probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal game state and the third normal game state And a fourth normal game state corresponding to high frequency support mode) is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to the normal jackpot result),
Means for shifting the game state to the second normal game state via the special game state when the determination result by the determination means in the second normal game state is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information. When,
Means for shifting the game state to the fourth normal game state via the special game state when the determination result by the determination means in the second normal game state is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when a winning result is obtained during the second normal game state, the state shifts to the special game state. After the end of the special game state, a branch occurs between a case of returning to the second normal game state and a case of shifting to the fourth normal game state (demotion). Thereby, the monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A9. The upper limit setting means, before reaching the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means, when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the special game state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising means for resetting the upper limit in the second normal game state when entering the second normal game state.

According to the feature A9, even if the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained while the game is progressing aiming at the upper limit in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state. likely to return. In the case of returning to the second normal game state, the upper limit is newly set, so that it is possible to re-challenge to shift to the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the desire to play due to the transition to the special game state.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, wherein a difference between the first upper limit and the second upper limit is smaller than the first upper limit.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the game cycle corresponding to the first upper limit is reached and the state does not shift to the third normal game state, the game cycle corresponding to the second upper limit is reached from there. By lowering the hurdles until reaching the second upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectations for reaching the second upper limit. As a result, even when a plurality of hurdles are used, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in motivation to play when the first hurdle is unsuccessful.

Feature A11. means for performing a predetermined notification in a game round corresponding to the first upper limit and a game round corresponding to the second upper limit when the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means; The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, characterized in that

As shown in feature A2 and the like, when a plurality of hurdles are provided for shifting to the third normal game state, for example, even if the first upper limit is not reached, the third By suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to the normal game state, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A12. Special information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by MPU 602 of main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (ball entry into operation opening 62a) is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (first normal game state corresponding to low frequency support mode and low probability mode) and the second normal game state (high A second normal game state corresponding to the frequency support mode and the high probability mode), and a third normal game state (a third normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. game state) and
Second normal game state transition means for shifting the game state to the second normal game state with the end of the special game state (MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes processing for transition to the second normal game state function) and
When shifting to the second normal game state by the second normal game state transition means, the upper limit setting means for setting the upper limit of the number of games in the second normal game state (the number of times of time reduction) (MPU 602 of main control device 162 function to set the number of working hours) and
Third normal game state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the game state from the second normal game state to the third normal game state based on the number of games played in the second normal game state reaching the upper limit A function to execute processing for transition to the third normal game state at the MPU 602 of the
A gaming machine, wherein a plurality of said upper limits are provided, and said upper limit setting means is configured to set any one of said plurality of upper limits as an upper limit of the number of games played in said second normal game state.

According to the feature A12, after the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state via the special game state, the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, and the player further It shifts to the 3rd normal game state advantageous to . A plurality of upper limits are provided, and the hurdles for transition to the third normal game state differ depending on which of these upper limits is set. That is, a second normal game state in which transition to the third normal game state is likely to occur, and a second normal game state in which transition to the third normal game state is difficult to occur. In this way, by diversifying the second normal game state and providing a plurality of transition hurdles to the third normal game state, the monotony of the game in the normal game state is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game is improved. can contribute.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features A3 to A11 to feature A12.

<Characteristic group B>
The following characteristic group B is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a game board on which a game area is formed and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute acquisition processing) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (first normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high A second normal game state corresponding to probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (third normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state game state) is provided,
When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the transition condition setting means for setting the transition condition to the third normal game state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 sets the number of times of time reduction function),
The transition condition setting means, in the second normal game state, when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information and the second normal game state is entered through the special game state, Mitigation means for easing the transition condition to the third normal game state (set when the number of times of time reduction set when a big hit result related to the right operation port 63a results in a big hit result related to the lower operation port 62a A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that is treated more preferentially than the number of times of time saving.

As shown in this feature, the monotony of the game can be suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the advantage increases by shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state to the third normal game state. Here, regarding the transition condition for shifting from the second normal game state to the most advantageous third normal game state, the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second normal game state (hereinafter referred to as winning result). It may be relieved when returning to the second normal game state through the special game state. If the hurdles to the third normal game state are lowered when the second normal game state is looped in this way, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by using a plurality of normal game states together is preferably exhibited. be able to.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board on which a game area is formed, and special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section provided in the game area. an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by said special information acquisition means; and determining whether or not the special information stored in said acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information. means for sequentially performing determination; pattern display means having a display section and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section; Based on the determination, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game cycle. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; When a determination result corresponding to the information is obtained and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game cycle control means, the game state is shifted to a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state transition means is provided, and the normal game state includes a first normal game state, a second normal game state more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a further state than the second normal game state. A third normal game state advantageous to the player is provided, and means for switching the game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state and the third normal game state according to the game situation. A gaming machine characterized by comprising

Feature B2. The transition condition setting means sets an upper limit of the number of games to be executed in the second normal game state as the transition condition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state,
Said moderation means, than said upper limit set when shifting from said first normal game state to said second normal game state, from said second normal game state via said special game state said second normal The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that it is a means for lowering the upper limit set when entering a game state.

As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the game is shifted to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit, whether or not the upper limit can be reached is advantageous for the game. important in moving forward. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, there is a case where the upper limit is lowered when the winning result is obtained in the second normal game state and the special game state returns to the second normal game state, and such an event occurs. By doing so, it is possible to heighten expectations for the transition to the third normal game state.

Feature B3. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to the normal jackpot result),
means for shifting to the second normal game state through the special game state when the determination result by the determination means during the second normal game state is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information;
and means for shifting to the first normal game state through the special game state when the determination result by the determination means during the second normal game state is a determination result corresponding to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that

As shown in this feature, in a gaming machine in which the winning result is the trigger for the transition (demotion) from the second normal game state to the first normal game state, the winning result in the second normal game state The game is played with the expectation that it will not happen. Here, when a winning result is obtained, while the game can be demoted to the first normal game state, the second normal game state may be restored and the conditions for transition to the third normal game state may be relaxed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a rapid decrease in the player's willingness to play when a winning result is obtained in the second normal game state.

Feature B4. The transition condition setting means, when the determination result by the determination means in the second normal game state becomes a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information and the second normal game state is entered through the special game state, The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, further comprising means for setting a transition condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

As shown in this feature, when a winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the hurdles to the third normal game state are not necessarily lowered, but are raised by providing a case where the game is tense. It can give you a feeling.

Feature B5. When the determination result by the determination means in the second normal game state becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the second normal game state is entered through the special game state, the transition condition by the relaxation means is set higher than the probability of setting a transition condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the transition condition set in advance by the transition condition setting means. The gaming machine described in .

As shown in the feature B1, in the configuration stepping up in order of the first normal game state → second normal game state → third normal game state, the winning result is obtained despite the transition to the second normal game state. Therefore, when an event such that the transition to the third normal game state becomes distant frequently occurs, it is easy to give the impression that the game in the second normal game state is slowed down. This can be a hindrance in trying to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, as shown in this feature, when a winning result is obtained in the second normal game state, the ratio of hurdle reduction is set higher than the ratio of hurdle raise, so that multiple normal game states can be used together. At the same time, it is possible to lighten the step-up of the game state.

Feature B6. As the starting ball-entering part, a first starting ball-entering part (lower operation port 62a) disposed in the first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second flow path different from the first flow path (right route) has a second starting ball portion (right operation port 63a),
As the transition conditions, a first transition condition (for example, the number of times of time saving "50" times) and a second transition condition that is easier to establish than the first transition condition (for example, the number of times of time saving "30", "10", "0" times ) is provided,
When the special information corresponding to the ball entering the second starting ball entering section provides a determination result corresponding to the predetermined decision information, the alleviation means prevents the ball entering the first starting ball entering section. The second transition condition is set at a higher rate than when the special information corresponding to the sphere results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information,
In the first normal game state, there are more opportunities for determination by the determination means when the game ball is shot into the first flow path than in the second flow path, and in the second normal game state, the game ball is shot more than the first flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the chances of determination by the determination means are increased when the game ball is shot to the second flow path.

According to the characteristic B6, when the game ball is launched to the first flow path in the first normal game state, the transition lottery to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the first start ball entering section. be done. When this lottery results in a winning result and shifts to the second normal game state, the first shift condition, which is relatively difficult to establish, tends to be set. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the main destination of the game ball becomes the second starting ball entry portion by shooting the game ball into the second flow path. A lottery for the transition to the special game state is executed based on the ball entered into the second start ball entry part, and the result is a winning result. It is easy to set a second transition condition that is easily established in With such a configuration, the technical idea shown in feature B1 can be suitably realized while avoiding complication of the configuration by using the existing configuration of the gaming machine.

Feature B7. A plurality of the second transition conditions are provided,
The mitigation means selects a plurality of the second transition conditions as the transition condition when the special information corresponding to the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion provides a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that the probability of setting the transition condition that is the easiest to satisfy is higher than the probability of setting other transition conditions.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the transition condition set when the second normal game state is looped is easier to establish than the transition condition set when the second normal game state is first transitioned. more opportunities. As a result, the relaxation function shown in feature B1 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, further comprising correspondence information display means for displaying transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

In a configuration in which transition conditions can be relaxed as shown in feature B1 and the like, displaying transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition conditions can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in feature B1 to feature B8 may be applied to feature A group.

<Characteristic group C>
The following characteristic group C is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute acquisition processing) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for shifting to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means (electric accessory 71) for switching between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball receiving portion and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. When,
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance period is shorter than that of the first switching mode mode) and
As determination modes in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
As the normal game state, a first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching A mode and a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided,
The second normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal game state,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state A first transition means for transitioning (a function of executing processing to transition to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, a reference number setting means for setting the reference number (number of times of time saving) (function of setting the number of times of time saving by MPU 602 of main control device 162);
Second transition means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing processing to shift to the third normal game state at.

According to the feature C1, when the number of games reaches the reference number of times without a winning result in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered by reaching the reference number of times. And it shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In other words, even if the high probability mode (advantageous game state) is reached, if the benefit is not obtained, the game can be further advantageously advanced by upgrading to the third normal game state. Become. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by trying to help the player.

The third normal game state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal game state by the difference in the combination of the switching control mode and the judgment mode. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while preventing the configuration related to the game from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. A special ball entry section (lower variable prize winning device 65) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter is provided, and the special ball entry section is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the start ball entry section. has been
The starting ball entry portion is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry portion in the gaming area, and when the starting ball entry portion is in the receiving state, the predetermined It is configured to restrict the flow down to the special ball entrance section via the flow path of
In the third normal game state, the chance that the game ball launched to the predetermined flow path enters the starting ball entry portion is reduced compared to the second normal game state, while entering the special ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is configured to increase the chances of hitting a ball.

According to the feature C2, in the second normal game state, the entry into the special ball entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the starting ball entry section, is regulated by the start ball entry section, and the transition to the third normal game state is made. By doing so, the regulation will be relaxed. In this way, the advantage of the third normal game state over the second normal game state can be ensured by increasing the chances of entering a ball into the special ball entry portion.

Feature C3. As the predetermined determination information, first information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to the special winning result) are provided,
The second transition means, when the number of games executed without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the first information in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times, from the second normal game state It is configured to shift to the third normal game state,
A special ball entry unit (lower variable winning device 65) capable of switching between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state;
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result corresponding to the second information, the ball entry control means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes opening/closing processing for switching the special ball entry section to the acceptance state). function) and
A first predetermined number of game balls are put out based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and a second predetermined number of game balls larger than the first predetermined number are paid out based on the ball entering the special ball entry section. With a payout means (payout device 222) to pay out,
The starting ball entry portion is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) leading to the special ball entry portion in the gaming area, and when the starting ball entry portion is in the receiving state, the predetermined It is configured to restrict the flow down to the special ball entrance section via the flow path of
In the third normal game state, as compared with the second normal game state, the ratio of the game balls that enter the special ball entry portion with respect to the game balls launched toward the predetermined flow path is increased. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that

According to the feature C3, in the second normal game state, the entry into the special ball entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the starting ball entry section, is regulated by the start ball entry section, and the state shifts to the third normal game state. By doing so, the regulation will be relaxed. In this way, the advantage of the third normal game state over the second normal game state can be ensured by increasing the chances of entering a ball into the special ball entry portion.

Feature C4. In the special game state in which the judgment result by the judgment means has shifted to the judgment result corresponding to the second information, means for maintaining the switching control mode to the switching control mode before the transition to the special game state is provided. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized by:

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the second normal game state, and when the determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained during the third normal game state. , the difference in ball entry frequency can be increased. This is preferable for emphasizing the superiority of the special ball entry section as shown in feature C2 and the like.

Feature C5. The reference number of times setting means is a first setting means,
Before reaching the reference number of times, the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result corresponding to the first information, and when the second normal game state is entered through the special game state, the reference number of times (time reduction number of times) A newly set second setting means (a function of resetting the number of time reductions when transitioning from the second normal game state to the second normal game state via the first special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4, characterized in that

According to the feature C5, when a winning result is obtained before the relief function is activated and the game returns to the second normal game state through the special game state, the reference number of times is reset. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the relief function shown in the feature C1 from becoming excessive.

Feature C6. The reference number of times setting means is a first setting means,
Third transition means (main A function of executing processing to shift to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the control device 162);
When shifting to the second normal game state by the third transition means, third setting means for newly setting the reference number of times (from the third normal game state to the second normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, further comprising: a function of resetting the number of times of time saving when shifting to .

When a winning result is obtained during relief, the player's willingness to play is rapidly increased with the end of the third normal game state by shifting to the second normal game state and leaving a way to return to the third normal game state. can be suppressed.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the third setting means has means for setting the reference number of times to be smaller than the reference number of times set by the first setting means.

When the third normal game state changes to the second normal game state, preferential treatment is given so that the reference number of times is comparatively reduced, so that the demotion of the game state becomes a factor of lowering the player's willingness to play. can be suppressed.

Feature C8. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute acquisition processing) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for shifting to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means (electric accessory 71) for switching between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball receiving portion and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. When,
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As the switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance period is shorter than that of the first switching mode ) is provided,
As determination modes in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the second switching mode and the high A first transition means for shifting to a second normal game state corresponding to the probability mode (a function of executing a process of shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state by the first transition means, the reference number of times setting means for setting the reference number of times (time saving number of times) function to set) and
When the number of games executed without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times, the switching control mode is changed from the second switching mode to the second switching mode. While switching to the 1 switching mode, by maintaining the determination mode in the high probability constant mode, from the second normal game state to the third normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. 2 transition means (function for executing processing to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal game state.

According to the feature C8, when the number of games reaches the reference number of times without a winning result in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered by reaching the reference number of times. And it shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. In other words, even if the high probability mode (advantageous game state) is reached, if the benefit is not obtained, the game can be further advantageously advanced by upgrading to the third normal game state. Become. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by trying to help the player.

The third normal game state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal game state by the difference in the combination of the switching control mode and the judgment mode. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game while preventing the configuration related to the game from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

The technical ideas shown in features C1 to C8 may be applied to the features A to B described above.

<Characteristic group D>
The characteristic group D below is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute acquisition processing) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
The starting ball entry section can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state,
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As switching control modes by the switching control means, there are a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance period is shorter than that of the first switching mode. is provided,
As the normal game state, a first type normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and a second type normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode are provided,
When shifting to the second type normal game state, reference number setting means (time reduction by MPU 602 of main control device 162) for setting the reference number (time reduction number) as the number of games for which the second type normal game state is continued function to set the number of times) and
A first transition means capable of shifting from the second type normal game state to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second type normal game state (to the third normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) function to execute migration processing) and
Second transition means capable of shifting from the second type normal game state to a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second type normal game state (to the first normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) function to execute the migration process of
wherein the game state is shifted by either the first shifting means or the second shifting means when the number of games executed in the second type normal game state reaches the reference number of times; Characteristic game machine.

In the second type normal game state, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entering section, and the game progresses smoothly. When the number of games executed in the second type normal game state reaches the reference number of times, the game state is shifted to a game state more advantageous to the player than the second type normal game state or to a game state disadvantageous to the player. It will happen. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the attention to the games.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute the acquisition process) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode), a third normal game state (normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state, and the There is provided a fourth normal game state (fourth normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than 1 normal game state,
When shifting to the second normal game state, the first setting means for setting the reference number of times (time reduction number of times) as the number of games for which the second normal game state is continued (second normal A function to set the number of times of time reduction according to the transition to the game state),
First transition means for shifting to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times function to execute migration processing) and
Second setting means for setting the reference number of times as the number of games for which the fourth normal game state is continued when shifting to the fourth normal game state function to set the number of times of working hours according to the transition) and
Second transition means for shifting to the first normal game state when the number of games executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the reference number of times (to the first normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing transition processing of

When the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times, the game is shifted (promoted) to the third normal game state which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the number of games executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the reference number of times, the game is shifted (downgraded) to the first normal game state. In the second normal game state, the game is played while expecting to reach the reference number of times, and in the fourth normal game state, the game is played while expecting to avoid reaching the reference number of times. Thus, even if the same reference number of times is set, the game state after reaching the reference number of times is divided into an advantageous side and a disadvantageous side depending on the game state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and attracting attention to the game. can contribute to improvement.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board on which a game area is formed, and special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is entered into a starting ball entry section provided in the game area. an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by said special information acquisition means; and determining whether or not the special information stored in said acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined judgment information. means for sequentially performing determination; pattern display means having a display section and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section; Based on the determination, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game cycle. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means; When a determination result corresponding to the information is obtained and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game cycle control means, the game state is shifted to a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state transition means is provided, and the normal game state includes a first normal game state, a second normal game state more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a further state than the second normal game state. A third normal game state advantageous to the player is provided, and means for switching the game state to the first normal game state, the second normal game state and the third normal game state according to the game situation. A gaming machine characterized by comprising

Feature D3. The starting ball entry section can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state,
Switching control means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for switching the starting ball part between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state,
As switching control modes by the switching control means, there are a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance period is shorter than that of the first switching mode. is provided,
The first normal game state and the third normal game state are game states in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode,
The second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are game states in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode,
The first setting means is configured to set the reference number of times as game times in which the second switching mode is continued in the second normal game state,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second setting means is configured to set the reference number of times as the game times in which the second switching mode is continued in the fourth normal game state. .

As shown in feature D2, in a configuration in which the game state can change to the advantage side/disadvantage side by reaching the reference number of times, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached. In this way, if the number of balls held is greatly reduced in a situation where the attention to the game is increasing, it is assumed that the increase in the attention to the game will easily lead to a decrease in the desire to play. be. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the switching control mode is set to the second switching mode, and by suppressing the decrease in possession balls, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

In addition, in a configuration in which the game state changes when the standard number of times is reached, the progress of the game is slowed down in the process, which lowers the impact and hinders the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the progress of the game is facilitated until the reference number of times is reached, and such concerns can be dispelled.

Feature D4. The game cycle control means is configured such that the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the first normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that

As shown in the feature D3, if the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state can be played while suppressing the reduction of the number of balls in hand, the main attention of the player can be easily directed to whether or not the reference number of times has been reached. In such a situation, if the variable display period of the pattern is shortened, it is preferable that the player becomes excessively fatigued in the process of reaching the reference number of times due to the continuous tenseness caused by the lengthening of the game rounds. can be suppressed to This is a preferable configuration for setting the reference number of times to a certain extent and exhibiting the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature D2 and the like.

Feature D5. The determination means has a probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when the determination is performed in the second normal game state, and the predetermined when the determination is performed in the fourth normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, wherein the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the determination information is different.

According to the feature D5, the same reference number of times when transitioning to the third normal game state via the second normal game state and when transitioning to the first normal game state via the fourth normal game state. is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times. As a result, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be exhibited more preferably.

Feature D6. When the determination is performed in the second normal game state, the determination means determines that the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained is the predetermined when the determination is performed in the fourth normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, characterized in that the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the determination information is higher than that of the determination information.

According to the feature D6, the same reference number of times when moving to the third normal game state via the second normal game state and when moving to the first normal game state via the fourth normal game state is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the reference number of times. As a result, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can be exhibited more preferably.

In particular, when shifting from the second normal game state to the advantageous third normal game state, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times becomes relatively low, and the fourth normal game state to the disadvantageous first normal game. When transitioning to the state, the possibility of reaching the reference number of times becomes relatively high. With such a configuration, even if it is assumed that the same reference number of times is reached, the hurdles for shifting to the third normal game state can be made relatively high, and the transition to the third normal game state can be made relatively difficult. A sense of anticipation can be suitably aroused.

Feature D7. When the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state are established, it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish between the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D6, characterized in that:

According to the feature D7, by making the second/fourth normal game state non-specific (difficult to specify), the game state to be shifted after reaching the reference number of times is the first normal game state and the third normal game state. A game of guessing which game state it is is added. By making it unclear whether the player will move to the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side, that is, whether the player will be promoted or demoted until the reference number of times is reached, it is possible to contribute to a further increase in the degree of attention when the reference number of times is reached.

Feature D8. means for executing a predetermined effect corresponding to the second normal game state over a plurality of game rounds executed in the second normal game state when the second normal game state is established;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, further comprising means for executing the predetermined effect when the fourth normal game state is established.

As shown in feature D8, the same display effect (predetermined effect) is executed in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, and the normal game state is not specified (difficult to specify). Then, a game is added in which the player guesses which of the first normal game state and the third normal game state the game state to be shifted to after reaching the reference number of times is reached. By making it unclear whether the player will move to the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side, that is, whether the player will be promoted or demoted until the reference number of times is reached, it is possible to contribute to a further increase in the degree of attention when the reference number of times is reached.

Feature D9. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to the normal jackpot result),
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the special game state is passed, and the first normal game state is changed to the second normal game state. a means of transferring,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the special game state is passed, and the first normal game state is changed to the fourth normal game state. A gaming machine according to feature D7 or feature D8, further comprising means for transitioning.

When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained in the first normal game state, the state is shifted to the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state. By sharing the transition pattern from the first normal game state to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state in this way, any game can be played before shifting to the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the state is As a result, the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature D7 and the like can be exhibited favorably.

Feature D10. a variable ball entry unit capable of switching between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state;
ball entry control means for switching the variable ball entry unit to the acceptance state when the special game state is established;
The said entering ball control means, the said special game state to shift when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained, and the special game state to be shifted when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained The gaming machine according to feature D9, wherein the switching mode of the variable ball-entering unit is common between the states.

As shown in the characteristic D10, by making the behavior of the variable ball entry portion common between the case of shifting to the second normal game state and the case of the transition to the fourth normal game state, the behavior of the variable ball entry portion is changed from the behavior of the second normal game state. It is possible to avoid revealing to which of the normal game state and the fourth normal game state the game state is shifted to. As a result, the effect shown in feature D9 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature D11. Suggestion means for suggesting the remaining number of times until reaching the reference number of times,
As a suggestion mode by the suggestion means, a first suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is specified and a second suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is not specified are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10, wherein the suggestion means is switchable between the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode.

As shown in feature D7 and the like, in the configuration in which the player is divided into the advantageous side and the disadvantageous side depending on the number of reference times reached, by explicitly switching the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached, the game can be played in the process until the reference number of times is reached. attention can be preferably improved.

It should be noted that each of the technical ideas shown in features D1 to D11 may be applied to the groups A to C described above.

<Characteristic group E>
The following characteristic group E is defined as "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Features E1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first ball entry unit (lower variable winning part) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state device 65);
A receiving state in which a game ball disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) toward the first ball entering portion in the gaming area and flowing down along the predetermined flow path can enter, and the receiving state a second ball-entering portion (right-side operating ball-entering portion 63) that can be switched to a non-accepting state in which ball-entering is more difficult than
Predetermined information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) acquires predetermined information (the value of the open random number counter C4) when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area. function to acquire the value of the open random number counter C4);
information storage means (electrical storage area 633 in RAM 604 of main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
Lottery means (function for executing support lottery by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for performing lottery to determine whether the second ball-entering section should be switched to the receiving state based on the predetermined information stored in the information storage means )When,
variable display means (main display unit 81) having a display section (through-gate display section DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Display control means for starting variable display of patterns on the display unit prior to the lottery by the lottery means or based on the fact that the lottery means has conducted the lottery, and for confirming and displaying the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means. (a function of executing a pattern display process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
Switching control means for switching the second ball-entering portion to the receiving state when a pattern corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the display portion (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) ) and
As switching control modes by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the ball is more likely to enter than the first switching mode are provided. cage,
The display control means controls the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the second switching mode to be longer than a first specific period that is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern in the first switching mode. is configured so that the second specific period, which is the sum of
A ball entering the first ball-entering section is more advantageous to the player than entering a ball into the second ball-entering section,
The second ball entry portion has an opening (operation opening 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time and a shutter (shutter 331) for opening and closing the opening. It is configured to be in the non-receiving state and to be in the receiving state by arranging the shutter at the open position,
When the second ball entering portion is in the non-receiving state, the shutter forms a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path,
A period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature E1, the time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is the sum of the pattern variable display period and the fixed display period in the second switching mode (second specific period). is longer than Therefore, most of the game balls that have reached the second ball entering portion enter the second ball entering portion during the second switching mode. In other words, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second ball entering portion, and entry into the first ball entering portion is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum of the pattern variable display period and the fixed display period (first specific period) in the first switching mode. Therefore, during the first switching mode, even if the second ball entering portion is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls that have reached the shutter pass through the second ball entering portion and enter the first ball. head to the department. In this way, the ball entering the first ball entering portion is relatively advantageous during the first switching mode, while the ball entering the first ball entering portion is suppressed during the second switching mode. Therefore, a clear difference can be generated in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to reduce the number of game balls (drops) that pass through the second ball entering portion and head to the first ball entering portion during the second switching mode in order to differentiate each switching mode, if the specific period is shortened good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it becomes difficult to fire/stop according to the result displayed on the display unit (to advance the game in a way that is even slightly advantageous to the player). The significance of having a department is diminished. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present feature, it is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the variable display period and fixed display period of the pattern while suppressing the omission. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The switching control means switches the second ball-entering part to the receiving state based on the lottery result of the lottery means regardless of whether the first ball-entering part is in the accepting state. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that

As shown in feature E2, in a configuration in which the first ball-entering unit may or may not be in the accepting state depending on the lottery result, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the display of the lottery result. It is technically significant to apply the technical idea shown in feature E1 to such a configuration to prevent the specific period from becoming extremely short.

Feature E3. A first predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the first ball entering section, and a second number less than the first predetermined number is paid out based on the ball entering the second ball entering section. 2 Provided with payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls,
Due to the difference in the number of game balls paid out by the payout means, the ball entering the first ball entering section is more advantageous to the player than the ball entering the second ball entering section. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

As shown in feature E3, in a configuration in which a ball entering the first ball entering section is treated more favorably than a ball entering the second ball entering section, the player expects a ball entering the first ball entering section. It is assumed that the game is played by In such a configuration, it is not preferable for the ball to enter the first ball entering portion excessively, because this causes the balance of the game to be lost. In this respect, according to the combination with the feature E1, it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering part while minimizing the period in which the second ball entering part is in the receiving state. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. And shortening the period of receiving state is advantageous in prompting the player's expectations as if the game ball were flowing down toward the first ball entering section, and the period of receiving state becomes longer. It is possible to suitably suppress the reduction in the expectation of the ball entering the first ball entering section.

Feature E4. The passage length of the connecting passage portion connecting the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the second ball-entering portion in the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the path length is shorter than the path length of .

As shown in characteristic E4, by making the passage length of the connecting passage portion shorter than the passage length of the second ball entrance portion, the second ball entrance portion can be operated under the condition that the first ball entrance portion is open. It is easy to give the impression to the player that the game ball that has reached the second ball entry part can enter the first ball entry part immediately as long as it passes through the second ball entry part, and the shutter of the second ball entry part and the first ball entry part This can contribute to improving the degree of attention paid to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the ball entry portion.

Feature E5. The first ball entry section has an opening (large winning opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time and a shutter (shutter) for opening and closing the opening. It is configured to be in the non-receiving state and to be in the receiving state by arranging the shutter at the open position,
When the first ball entering portion is in the non-receiving state, the shutter of the first ball entering portion forms part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path,
The passage length of the connecting passage portion connecting the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first ball-entering portion in the predetermined flow path. and the passage length of the passage portion formed by the shutter of the second ball entrance portion in the predetermined flow passage. The gaming machine described in 1.

Since most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter either the first ball-entering part or the second ball-entering part, the combination of the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part results in one large ball. You can make it look like the entry section is being built. Making it appear as if the ball entry opportunity for the game ball is secured by the large ball entry portion is advantageous in improving the player's sense of satisfaction. Here, by making the passage length of the connecting passage portion shorter than the passage length of the passage portion formed by the shutters, it is possible to strengthen the sense of unity between the two ball-entering portions. Thereby, the above impression can be strengthened.

In addition, by making the passage length of the connecting passage portion shorter than the passage length of the second ball entering portion, the game ball reaching the second ball entering portion under the condition that the first ball entering portion is open A game ball that reaches the shutter of the second ball-entering part or the first ball-entering part is likely to give the player the impression that the ball can enter the first ball-entering part immediately if it can pass through the second ball-entering part. It can contribute to the improvement of attention to the behavior of

Feature E6. The first ball entry section has an opening (large winning opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time and a shutter (shutter) for opening and closing the opening. It is configured to be in the non-receiving state and to be in the receiving state by arranging the shutter at the open position,
When the first ball entering portion is in the non-receiving state, the shutter of the first ball entering portion forms part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path,
Characteristic E4 or Characteristic E5, characterized in that the shutter of the first ball entrance portion and the shutter of the second ball entrance portion extend in a predetermined direction, and the communication passage portion extends in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

As described above, if most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path are configured to enter either the first ball entering portion or the second ball entering portion, the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion By combining the parts, one large ball entry part can be constructed. Making it appear as if the ball entry opportunity for the game ball is secured by the large ball entry portion is advantageous in improving the player's sense of satisfaction.

In this type of large ball-entering section, when the main ball-entering destination is switched between the first ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section depending on the situation, situations in which the ball should not enter the first ball-entering section The occurrence of a ball entering the first ball-entering portion at , increases the possibility that the game hall suffers a disadvantage. In consideration of such circumstances, a communication passage is provided between the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part to delay or thin out the movement of game balls toward the first ball-entering part. has technical significance. If the connecting passage is lengthened to some extent, these functions can be preferably exhibited, but on the other hand, there is a concern that the sense of unity between both ball-entering parts will be reduced, and the impression that it is a large ball-entering part will be lessened. be. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the shutters of both ball entry portions extend in a predetermined direction, and the connecting passage portion extends in a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction. ) structure, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the sense of unity between both ball entry parts while increasing the passage length of the connecting passage.

Feature E7. A discharge port (out port 68) through which game balls are discharged from the game area is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area,
A branch passage portion is formed in the middle position of the communication passage portion, and the game ball flowing into the branch passage portion is discharged from the game area without reaching the discharge port. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized by:

A game ball that has flowed into a branch passage portion provided in the middle of the communication passage portion is discharged from the game area as it is, and is prevented from reaching the first ball entering portion. In this way, some of the game balls that have passed through the second ball-entering portion are discharged from the game area without flowing into the first ball-entering portion. Compared to the configuration facing the discharge port, the impression of the above-mentioned large ball entry portion 1 can be strengthened.

Feature E8. A decelerating portion (projections 335a, 336a) for decelerating the game ball is provided in the portion where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball entering portion in the predetermined flow path,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the deceleration section is arranged at a position close to the connecting passage section.

In a configuration in which the first ball-entering part is treated more favorably than the second ball-entering part, the game ball passes through the second ball-entering part and heads for the first ball-entering part. It is assumed that the shooting operation is executed in anticipation of this, and the player's attention is likely to be directed to the movement of the game ball from the second ball entry portion to the communication passage portion. Here, in the configuration in which the deceleration section is provided in the passage formed by the shutter to extend the required passage period, the deceleration section is arranged so as to be biased toward the connecting passage section, thereby increasing the attention of the player. It is possible to make it easy to follow the movement of the game ball with the eyes at a place where it is easy to face. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the further attention degree.

Feature E9. The first ball-entering portion is configured to switch to the receiving state based on the ball entering the second ball-entering portion,
During the period in which the second ball-entering portion is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the game ball passes through a portion of the predetermined flow path where a passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball-entering portion. According to any one of features E1 to E8, the period is shorter than the period required for the first ball-entering portion to be in the receiving state. game machine.

As shown in this feature, the period in which the second ball-entering portion is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is defined as the part of the predetermined passage where the passage portion is formed by the shutter of the second ball-entering portion. Even if it is shorter than the time required for passing through, the game ball positioned on the shutter will enter the first ball entering part when the first ball entering part is switched to the receiving state. . Therefore, it is possible to secure the ball entering the second ball entering part while increasing the number of game balls moving to the first ball entering part by shortening the period of the receiving state.

Also, in the first switching mode, the period during which the second ball-entering section is in the accepting state is set to be shorter than the period in which the first ball-entering section is in the accepting state. The behavior of the two ball-entering sections makes it easier to grasp the fact that the ball is likely to enter the ball, and the player's attention can be easily directed to the ball entering the first ball-entering section.

Feature E10. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First acquisition means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute acquisition processing) and
a first storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
First determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 performs lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the first storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). functions to perform) and
a first display portion (for example, an operation opening display portion DR) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
prior to the determination by the first determination means or based on the determination by the first determination means, starting variable display of the pattern on the first display unit, and as a result of the determination; Displaying the stop result corresponding to the above and ending the variable display of the pattern is regarded as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A first display control means (for example, a function of executing a game round control process by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the display of the first display unit so as to be performed;
A special ball entry unit (lower variable winning device) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a receiving state in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state in which it is more difficult to enter than the receiving state 65) and
The determination result by the first determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the special ball entry section is selected based on the stop display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result by the first display control means. A first switching control means for switching to the acceptance state (a function of executing opening and closing processing of the lower variable winning device 65 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The starting ball entering section is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) toward the special entering ball section, and a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter and from the receiving state It is possible to switch to a non-accepting state where it is difficult to enter the ball,
Second acquisition means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for acquiring predetermined information (value of open random number counter C4) when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area function to acquire the value of the open random number counter C4);
a second storage means (electrical storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the second acquisition means;
Second determination means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a support lottery for determining whether or not to switch the starting ball entry section to the acceptance state based on the predetermined information stored in the second storage means) function) and
a second display unit (thru-gate display unit DS) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the determination by the second determination means or based on the determination by the second determination means, the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is started to correspond to the determination result by the second determination means. a second display control means (a function of executing a pattern display process in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for confirming and displaying the pattern that has been drawn;
Second switching control means for switching the starting ball entry portion to the acceptance state when the design corresponding to the winning result is confirmed and displayed on the second display portion function to execute) and
As switching control modes by the second switching control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the period in which the starting ball entering section is in the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. (High frequency support mode) is provided,
The second display control means controls the second switching mode rather than a first specific period which is the sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of the pattern on the second display unit when the first switching mode is set. The second specific period, which is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern on the second display unit in the case of, is configured to be shorter,
A first predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls are put out based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, and a second predetermined number larger than the first predetermined number is paid out based on the entering ball into the special ball entering section. Provided with payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a number (for example, 10) of game balls,
The starting ball entry portion has an opening (right operation opening 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time and a shutter (shutter 331) that opens and closes the opening. It is configured to be in the non-receiving state and to be in the receiving state by arranging the shutter at the open position,
When the starting ball entering portion is in the non-receiving state, the shutter forms a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path,
A period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. Characteristic game machine.

According to the feature E10, the time required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path to pass over the shutter is the sum of the pattern variable display period and the fixed display period in the second switching mode (second specific period). is longer than Therefore, most of the game balls that have reached the second ball entering portion enter the second ball entering portion during the second switching mode. In other words, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second ball entering portion, and entry into the first ball entering portion is suppressed. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum of the pattern variable display period and the fixed display period (first specific period) in the first switching mode. Therefore, during the first switching mode, even if the second ball entering portion is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls that have reached the shutter pass through the second ball entering portion and enter the first ball. head to the department. In this way, the ball entering the first ball entering portion is relatively advantageous during the first switching mode, while the ball entering the first ball entering portion is suppressed during the second switching mode. Therefore, a clear difference can be generated in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to reduce the number of game balls (drops) that pass through the second ball entering portion and head to the first ball entering portion during the second switching mode in order to differentiate each switching mode, if the specific period is shortened good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it becomes difficult to fire/stop according to the result displayed on the display (advantageously advancing the game), and the significance of providing the display diminishes. put away. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present feature, it is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the variable display period and fixed display period of the pattern while suppressing the omission. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features E2 to E9 to this feature.

Also, the technical ideas shown in features E1 to E10 may be applied to the groups A to D described above.

<Feature group F>
The following feature group F is "A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls being paid out is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).", there is an invention that states, "In the above-described type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the level of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature F1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute the acquisition process) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one game cycle, and the pattern is displayed in a variable manner in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (first normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high A second normal game state corresponding to probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (third normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state game state) is provided,
The game cycle control means has a variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting the variable display time of the pattern in the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A game machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to the feature F1, by switching the game state in the order of the first normal game state→second normal game state→third normal game state, the player's advantage increases. Here, when the second normal game state is shifted to the third normal game state, the pattern variable display period is shortened, and the progress speed of the game is increased. As a result, the exhilaration of the game can be suitably improved when the first normal game state is promoted to the third normal game state via the second normal game state, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Regarding the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state, for example, when compared in terms of the increase or decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses, the second normal game state is higher than the first normal game state. The difference is preferably provided so that the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute the acquisition process) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one game cycle, and the pattern is displayed in a variable manner in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) to shift to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (first normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high A second normal game state corresponding to probability mode and high frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (third normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state game state) is provided,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state A first transition means for transitioning (a function of executing processing to transition to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A second transition means for directly transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state (a function to shift to the third normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game cycle control means has a variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting the variable display time of the pattern in the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A game machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to the feature F2, by switching the game state in the order of the first normal game state→second normal game state→third normal game state, the player's advantage increases. Here, when the second normal game state is shifted to the third normal game state, the pattern variable display period is shortened, and the progress speed of the game is increased. As a result, the exhilaration of the game can be suitably improved when the first normal game state is promoted to the third normal game state via the second normal game state, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

In particular, although the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is configured to go through the special game state, the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is performed directly. Therefore, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated at the time of transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be emphasized. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without excessively increasing the difference in the variable display period between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern variable display period from being extremely shortened by changing the progress speed of the game, and secure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the pattern.

Regarding the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the third normal game state, for example, when compared in terms of the increase or decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses, the second normal game state is higher than the first normal game state. The difference is preferably provided so that the third normal game state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state.

Feature F3. When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state by the first transition means, the reference number of times setting means for setting the reference number of times (time saving number of times) function to set
The second transition means is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature F2, characterized in that

As shown in the feature F3, if the configuration is such that the second normal game state is shifted to the third normal game state when the reference number of times has elapsed, it is possible to make it appear as if the game suddenly accelerates with the passage of the reference number of times. . With such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature F2 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature F4. Switching means for switching the starting ball-entering portion between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball-entering portion and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the starting ball-entering portion (electric accessory 71);
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
The obtained information storage means can store a plurality of the special information,
The variable display period setting means is configured to set the variable display period such that the variable display period of the pattern on the display unit becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases. and
The period shortening means at least shortens the variable display period of the pattern set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit in the third normal game state. 2. The variable display period is shortened by making it shorter than the variable display period of the pattern set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit in the normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

As shown in feature F4, if the starting ball entry section is configured to be switchable between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state, the frequency of game ball entry can be increased according to the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the variable display period is shortened as the number of stored special information increases, it is possible to increase the progress speed of the game. Here, the variable display period when the number of memories has reached the upper limit should be included as a target for shortening the period accompanying the transition from the second normal game state that is advantageous to the player to the third normal game state that is more advantageous to the player. For example, the progress speed of the game can be increased in a situation where balls are frequently entered into the starting ball entry section. Therefore, the effect of raising the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state can be preferably exhibited.

Feature F5. The game round control means has a stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period of the pattern (a function of setting the fixed display time of the pattern in the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The stop display period setting means is configured to set the stop display period in the second normal game state and the stop display period in the third normal game state to be the same period,
The period shortening means makes the pattern variable display period in the second normal game state longer than the stop display period, and the pattern variable display period in the third normal game state shorter than the stop display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the variable display period is shortened in this way.

In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the stop display period (fixed display period) of the pattern is common, and the variable display period of the pattern is made different from the length of the stop display period. A player who pays attention can compare the length of the variable display period based on the same reference (common stop display period). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

Feature F6. The period shortening means shortens the pattern variable display period in the second normal game state so as to be shorter than the pattern variable display period in the first normal game state, and the pattern variable display period in the third normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the display period is shortened so as to be shorter than the pattern variable display period in the second normal game state. .

As shown in feature F6, the game progresses at a faster speed as the game progresses step-up so that the game state is advantageous to the player. .

Feature F7. As the start-up ball part, a first start-up ball part (lower operation ball part 62) disposed in the first flow-down route (left route) in the game area, and a second ball different from the first flow-down route and a second start-up ball section (right side operation ball section 63) disposed in the second flow path (right route),
The first flow path and the second flow path are such that a game ball flowing down the first flow path cannot be entered into the second start ball entering portion and a game ball flowing down the second flow path 1 It is formed so that it is impossible to enter the starting ball entering part,
In the first normal game state, by shooting the game ball to the first flow-down path, it is possible to advance the game more favorably for the player than when the game ball is shot to the second flow-down path. , In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, by shooting the game ball to the second flow-down path, the game is played as compared with the case of shooting the game ball to the first flow-down path It is structured so that it is possible to proceed in an advantageous manner,
The variable display period setting means includes first setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering section, and setting the variable display period of the pattern based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering section. and second setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern,
The first setting means sets the same variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state and the third normal game state,
The second setting means constitutes the period shortening means so that the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that the variable display period is shortened.

As shown in feature F7, by shortening the variable display period for the second start ball entry portion, which is the main ball entry destination in the third normal game state, the effect of shortening the period can be exhibited favorably. As for the first starting ball-entering portion, which is not the main ball-entering destination, the variable display period is set to be the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, thereby changing the progress speed of the game, thereby increasing the exhilaration. can be suppressed from becoming a factor of excessively complicating the control process related to the variable display of the pattern.

Feature F8. A variable ball entry section (for example, a lower variable winning device 65),
A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the ball entering the variable ball entering portion,
By shifting to the special game state by the special game state shifting means, the variable ball entry portion is switched to the receiving state,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state in which the variable ball entry portion is in the receiving state for a shorter period than the first special game state are provided,
In the third normal game state, the probability of a ball entering the variable ball-entering portion when shifting to the second special game state is higher than in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, by repeating the transition from the third normal game state to the second special game state, an increase in possession balls can be expected. Here, the transition pace to the second special game state depends on the speed at which the game cycle is completed. As shown in the feature F1, etc., in the third normal game state, by increasing the digestion speed, the increase speed of the possession ball can be changed (fastened) without excessively complicating various structures provided in the game area and the like. be able to.

Feature F9. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to the special winning result),
Said special game state transition means means for shifting the game state to a first special game state as said special game state (main control a function of executing transition processing to the first special game state by the MPU 602 of the device 162; It has a means for shifting to the second special game state as (a function of executing the transition process to the second special game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
At least in the third normal game state, the determination result by the determination means is more likely to be the determination result corresponding to the second determination information than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
The second special game state is set so that the period during which the special game state is maintained is shorter than the first special game state,
The period shortening means shortens the variable display period of the pattern when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the third normal game state to the second determination information in the second normal game state. According to any one of features F1 to F8, characterized in that the variable display period is set to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern when the corresponding determination result is obtained. game machine.

When transition to the second special game state occurs frequently in the third normal game state, there is a possibility that the progress of the game will be delayed by ensuring the execution period of the second special game state. This can be a factor that prevents an increase in the progress speed of the game in the 3 normal game state. Therefore, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second normal game state, the pattern variable display period is shortened, so that the transition to the second special game state can be repeated. Even if there is, it is possible to increase the progress speed of the game and improve the exhilaration of the game.

Feature F10. Switching means for switching the starting ball-entering portion between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball-entering portion and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the starting ball-entering portion (electric accessory 71);
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is configured to set the variable display period so that the variable display period of the pattern becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases,
The period shortening means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the third normal game state has reached the upper limit and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information. The pattern variable display period set when the result is obtained is determined by the judgment means when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit in the second normal game state. Characteristic feature F9, characterized in that the variable display period is set so as to be shorter than the variable display period of the pattern set when the determination result becomes the determination result corresponding to the second determination information. game machine.

As shown in this feature, it is possible to switch the starting ball entry section between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state, and by securing the number of special information (for example, by shifting near the upper limit), the progress speed of the game can be increased. . However, for example, when the second special game state is entered for each game round, it is assumed that the progress of the game is delayed due to securing the execution period of the second special game state. It is assumed that this is an obstacle to improving the exhilaration of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the variable display period is shortened when the number of stored special information reaches the upper limit, the effect shown in feature F1 and the like can be preferably exhibited. can.

Feature F11. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute the acquisition process) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination. is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game cycle, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the pattern display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for shifting to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means for switching the starting ball-entering portion between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball-entering portion and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the starting ball-entering portion (electric accessory 71);
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance period is shorter than that of the first switching mode mode) and
As determination modes in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
As the normal game state, a first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching A mode and a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided,
The game cycle control means has a variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting the variable display time of the pattern in the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A game machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to the feature F11, by shifting from the second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry portion is reduced. However, since the pattern variable display period is shortened in the third normal game state as compared with the second normal game state, it is possible to suppress slowdown in the progress of the game due to a decrease in the frequency of entering balls. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F12. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main controller 162 MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for acquiring special information (holding information) when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area function to execute the acquisition process) and
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes lottery processing) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (e.g. winning information). function) and
a pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) having a display portion (for example, the operation port display portion DR) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one game cycle, and the pattern is displayed in a variable manner in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game round control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. Special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for shifting to special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) advantageous to
Switching means for switching the starting ball-entering portion between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball-entering portion and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the starting ball-entering portion (electric accessory 71);
Switching control means for controlling the switching means (function for executing electric support processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
As switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance period is shorter than that of the first switching mode mode) and
As determination modes in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a high-probability mode in which the probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high and a probability of obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
As the normal game state, a first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching A mode and a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state A first transition means for transitioning (a function of executing processing to transition to the second normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, a reference number setting means for setting the reference number (number of times of time saving) (function of setting the number of times of time saving by MPU 602 of main control device 162);
Second transition means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times with a function to execute the process of shifting to the third normal game state),
The game cycle control means has a variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the pattern (a function of setting the variable display time of the pattern in the display unit for the operation port by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the pattern in the third normal game state than the variable display period of the pattern in the second normal game state. A game machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to the feature F12, by shifting from the second normal game state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode, the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entry portion is reduced. However, since the pattern variable display period is shortened in the third normal game state as compared with the second normal game state, it is possible to suppress slowdown in the progress of the game due to a decrease in the frequency of entering balls. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, although the transition from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is configured to go through the special game state, the transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is performed directly. Therefore, when the progress speed of the game is accelerated at the time of transition from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the difference can be emphasized. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without excessively increasing the difference in the variable display period between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern variable display period from being extremely shortened by changing the progress speed of the game, and secure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the pattern.

Feature F13. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the entry into the starting ball entering section,
When a new ball is entered into the starting ball entry section under a situation where the number of stored special information has reached a preset upper limit, the obtained information storage means It is configured not to store special information based on
In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the difference in the storage rate of special information stored by the acquired information storage means is smaller than the difference in the ball entry rate to the starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature F11 or feature F12, which is configured as follows.

According to the feature F13, between the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the second normal game state is preferentially treated in terms of the number of game balls paid out based on the ball entering the starting ball entering portion. be. However, the number of special information acquired based on the ball entering the starting ball entering portion can be made equal between the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the differentiation between the two normal game states by shortening the variable display period from failing to function well due to, for example, the third normal game state being inferior in the transition of the number of special information accompanying the progress of the game.

Incidentally, in combination with the feature F8, it is possible to make the "payout means" shown in this feature and the "payout means" shown in the feature F8 the same. In this case, the number of game balls paid out based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion is the “first predetermined number”, and the number of game balls paid out based on the entry into the variable entry portion is the “second prescribed number”. number.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the obtained information storage means stores a new ball in the starting ball entering section under a situation where the number of special information stored has reached a preset upper limit. When it occurs, it is configured not to store the special information based on the entry, and in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the second normal game state is the start ball entry section The gaming machine according to feature F11 or feature F12, characterized in that the number of special information items stored in the obtained information storage means is the same while the frequency of ball entry into the game machine increases." It is also possible to

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas shown in features F11 to F13 to features F1 to F10.

Also, the technical ideas shown in features F1 to F13 may be applied to the features A to E described above.

<Characteristic group G>
The following feature group G is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature G1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
1st special information (for example, reservation information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball is entered into the first start ball entry portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162);
a first acquired information storage means (reservation area Ra for the lower opening of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes the lottery process) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lottery such as a big win) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means function) and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (reservation information related to right operation opening 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry portion (for example, right operation opening 63a) provided in the game area Acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162);
a second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right operation opening of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for performing second lottery processing (lottery for big wins, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means )When,
It has a first display portion (for example, the display portion for the lower operation port DL) and a second display portion (for example, the display portion for the right operation port DR), and a pattern is displayed on each of the first display portion and the second display portion. variably displayable pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81);
Before the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special stored in the first acquisition information storage means is defined as one game cycle in which the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated. a first game round control means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is displayed variably according to the information; ,
Before the second lottery process is performed by the second lottery means or based on the fact that the second lottery process is performed by the second lottery means, the second display unit starts to variably display the pattern. The second special stored in the second acquisition information storage means is defined as one game cycle in which the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated. a second game round control means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is displayed variably according to the information; ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means is a predetermined winning result, and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stop-displayed by the first game spin control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result. The game state is changed to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stop-displayed by the second game cycle control means as a winning result. ) to shift to special game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
A game round by the first game round control means and a game round by the second game round control means can proceed at the same time,
As the normal game state, a first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a second normal game state (normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode), A third normal game state (normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) is provided,
In the third normal game state, the required period of the game round by the first game round control means and the required period of the game round by the first game round control means are different,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means in the first normal game state is a predetermined winning result or when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, the first normal game A first transition means for transitioning from the state to the second normal game state through the special game state (function for executing processing to shift to the second normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, a reference number setting means for setting the reference number (number of times of time saving) (function of setting the number of times of time saving by MPU 602 of main control device 162);
Second transition means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times with a function to execute the process of shifting to the third normal game state),
The reference count corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage means when the first transition means transitions to the second normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is stipulated such that the game round to be played is completed before the transition to the third normal game state.

According to the feature G1, when a winning result is obtained in the first normal game state and the state shifts to the second normal game state, the reference number of times is set as the number of times the game can be executed in the second normal game state. . When the number of times the game is played in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times, the game is shifted to the third normal game state. At this time, all the special information relating to the first ball-entering portion is consumed during the second normal game state, and carryover to the third normal game state is avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game round progresses based on the special information relating to the second ball-entering section. The required period (the sum of the pattern variable display period and the fixed display period) is different between the game round corresponding to the first ball entering section and the game round corresponding to the second ball entering section, and the game progress rhythm is different. can. Therefore, by completely digesting the special information related to the first ball-entering portion before shifting to the third normal game state, it becomes possible to progress the game in the third normal game state with good rhythm.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a first start ball entry part (for example, a lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. First special information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing by MPU 602 of main controller 162) for acquiring first special information (for example, hold information related to lower working opening 62a) when a ball enters the and a first acquired information storage means (reservation area Ra for the lower opening of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means, and stored in the first acquired information storage means. First lottery means (function for executing lottery processing in MPU 602 of main control unit 162) that sequentially performs first lottery processing (lottery such as a big hit) based on the first special information that has been provided, and provided in the game area Second special information acquisition means (main control a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the device 162); area Rb) and second lottery means (by MPU 602 of main controller 162) that sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win or the like) based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means a function of executing a lottery process), a first display portion (for example, a display portion for the lower operation port DL) and a second display portion (for example, a display portion for the right operation port DR), and the first display portion and the Before the first lottery process is performed by the pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying the pattern on each of the two display units, and the first lottery means, or by the first lottery means Based on the fact that the first lottery process is performed, the first display unit starts the variable display of the pattern, displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and ends the variable display of the pattern. The pattern display means is controlled so that the pattern of each game round is variably displayed according to the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. 1 game round control means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the second lottery means Prior to the second lottery process being performed or the second lottery means Based on the fact that the second lottery process was performed by Then, the second display unit starts the variable display of the pattern, displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and ends the variable display of the pattern as one game round. Second game round control means (for example, the main controller 162) for controlling the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is variably displayed according to the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means; A function of executing a game round control process by the MPU 602), and the lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game round control means. Alternatively, the game state is changed to the normal game state based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game cycle control means. special game state transition means (function for executing processing for game state transition in MPU 602 of main controller 162) for shifting to a special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal As the game state, the first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the second normal game state (normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the third A normal game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) is provided, and when the lottery result by the first lottery means in the first normal game state is a predetermined winning result. Or when the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, the first transition means (main control device 162 MPU 602 to execute processing to shift to the second normal game state), and when shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, the reference for setting the reference number (time reduction number) When the number of times setting means (the function of setting the number of times of time saving in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the number of games executed in the second normal game state becomes the reference number of times, the second normal game state 2nd transition means for shifting from to the third normal game state (function for executing processing to shift to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and the reference number of times is the first transition When the first special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage means when the transition to the second normal game state is performed by the means, A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is stipulated such that a game round corresponding to the first special information is completed before transition to the third normal gaming state. ” is also possible.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
1st special information (for example, reservation information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball is entered into the first start ball entry portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162);
a first acquired information storage means (reservation area Ra for the lower opening of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 executes the lottery process) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lottery such as a big win) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means function) and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (reservation information related to right operation opening 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry portion (for example, right operation opening 63a) provided in the game area Acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162);
a second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right operation opening of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by MPU 602 of main control unit 162) for performing second lottery processing (lottery for big wins, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means )When,
It has a first display portion (for example, the display portion for the lower operation port DL) and a second display portion (for example, the display portion for the right operation port DR), and a pattern is displayed on each of the first display portion and the second display portion. variably displayable pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81);
Before the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special stored in the first acquisition information storage means is defined as one game cycle in which the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated. a first game round control means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) for controlling the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is displayed variably according to the information; ,
Before the second lottery process is performed by the second lottery means or based on the fact that the second lottery process is performed by the second lottery means, the second display unit starts to variably display the pattern. The second special stored in the second acquisition information storage means is defined as one game cycle in which the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated. a second game round control means (for example, a function of executing game round control processing by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that controls the pattern display means so that the pattern of each game round is displayed variably according to the information; ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means is a predetermined winning result, and the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stop-displayed by the first game spin control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result. The game state is changed to a special game state (e.g. opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the pattern corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stop-displayed by the second game cycle control means as a winning result. ) to shift to special game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in MPU 602 of main control device 162),
A game round by the first game round control means and a game round by the second game round control means can proceed at the same time,
As the normal game state, the first normal game state (normal game state corresponding to low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the second normal game state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state and a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) and a third normal game state (normal game state corresponding to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state. and
When the lottery result by the first lottery means in the first normal game state is a predetermined winning result or when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, the first normal game A first transition means for transitioning from the state to the second normal game state through the special game state (function for executing processing to shift to the second normal game state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state, a reference number setting means for setting the reference number (number of times of time saving) (function of setting the number of times of time saving by MPU 602 of main control device 162);
Second transition means (MPU 602 of main controller 162) for shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times with a function to execute the process of shifting to the third normal game state),
The reference count corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage means when the first transition means transitions to the second normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is stipulated such that the game round to be played is completed before the transition to the third normal game state.

According to the feature G2, when a predetermined winning result is obtained in the first normal game state and the state is shifted to the second normal game state, the reference number of times is set as the number of times the game can be executed in the second normal game state. be done. When the number of times the game is played in the second normal game state reaches the reference number of times, the game is shifted to the third normal game state. Here, the reference number of times is defined so that all the special information relating to the first ball-entering section can be digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, when the state changes from the second normal game state to the third normal game state without achieving a predetermined winning result, all the special information related to the first ball-entering portion is consumed during the second normal game state. As a result, carryover to the third normal game state is avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game round progresses based on the special information relating to the second ball-entering section. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of game rounds related to the first ball-entering portion, it becomes possible to progress the game in the third normal game state with good rhythm.

Feature G3. The game according to feature G2, wherein the lottery by the second lottery means is more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means at least in the third normal game state. machine.

As shown in the feature G3, in the configuration in which the second ball-entering section is given preferential treatment, the third normal game is performed by digesting the special information related to the first ball-entering section before shifting to the third normal game state. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's superiority in the state.

Feature G4. The second transition means determines that the sum of the number of game rounds executed by the first game round control means and the number of game rounds executed by the second game round control means reaches the reference number of times in the second normal game state. Based on this, it is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state,
The reference number of times is greater than the upper limit number of the first special information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means,
When the number of the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means reaches the upper limit number at the time of transition to the second normal game state, it is executed based on the first special information. The total period of the variable display period and fixed display period of the pattern on the first display unit for each game round is the minimum required period required for the game rounds executed in the second normal game state to reach the reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than.

According to the feature G4, it is determined whether or not the reference number of times has been reached by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. The reference number of times is set to be greater than the upper limit number of storage of the first special information, and the total sum (total period) of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern of the first display unit in the second normal game state is the It is possible to suitably avoid carry-over of the first special information to the third normal game state by making the game times executed in the second normal game state shorter than the shortest required period until the number of times of the game reaches the reference number. can. As a result, the effect shown in feature G2 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature G5. The second transition means determines that, in the second normal game state, the sum of the number of game rounds executed by the first game round control means and the number of game rounds executed by the second game round control means reaches the reference number of times. Based on this, it is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state,
The reference number of times is defined as the upper limit number of first special information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means and the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reaching the upper limit number. is set to be greater than the sum of the maximum number of game rounds that can be executed by the second game round control means until each game round corresponding to the first special information is executed. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, characterized in that

According to the feature G5, it is determined whether or not the reference number of times has been reached by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. A third normal game state is achieved by setting the reference number of times to be greater than the sum of the upper limit number of memories of the first special information and the number of game times corresponding to the second special information that can be executed until all the first special information is consumed. carryover of the first special information to the can be preferably avoided. As a result, the effect shown in feature G2 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature G6. The second transition means determines that the sum of the number of game rounds executed by the first game round control means and the number of game rounds executed by the second game round control means reaches the reference number of times in the second normal game state. Based on this, it is configured to shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state,
In the second normal game state, when the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit number at the time of transition to the second normal game state, the first special information For each game round, during the total period of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern on the first display section, the second game round control means causes the variable display and fixed display of the pattern on the second display section a predetermined number of times. It has a configuration that can be executed,
The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, wherein the reference number of times is greater than the sum of the upper limit number and the predetermined number of times.

According to the feature G6, it is determined whether or not the reference number of times has been reached by the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. A third normal game state is achieved by setting the reference number of times to be greater than the sum of the upper limit number of memories of the first special information and the number of game times corresponding to the second special information that can be executed until all the first special information is consumed. carryover of the first special information to the can be preferably avoided. As a result, the effect shown in feature G2 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature G7. A special ball entry section (for example, an upper variable winning section) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the receiving state device 64);
a special ball-entering unit switching means (a function of executing opening/closing control by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for switching the special ball-entering unit to the receiving state in the special game state;
In the game area, as a flow path along which the game ball flows, a first flow path (left route) in which the first start ball entry part is arranged, the second start ball entry part and the special ball entry part is provided, and in the first normal game state, a game ball is shot to the first flow path rather than to the second flow path In the second normal game state and the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the second flow path than to shoot the game ball to the first flow path. configured to benefit
The first flow path and the second flow path are such that a game ball flowing down the first flow path cannot be entered into the second start ball entering portion and a game ball flowing down the second flow path 1 It is formed so that it is impossible to enter the starting ball entering part,
The special ball entering portion is arranged upstream of the second starting ball entering portion in the second flow path, and by entering the receiving state, the game ball enters the second starting ball entering portion. It is configured to prevent flow down,
Information display means for displaying information corresponding to the number of times the game is played in the second normal game state (function for displaying the remaining number of times on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6.

According to the feature G7, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first flow-down route to the second flow-down route with the transition to the special game state. At this time, the game ball is prevented from flowing down to the second starting ball entering portion by the special ball entering portion being in the receiving state. Thereby, the number of the second special information stored at the start of the second normal game state can be reduced. Therefore, at the start of the second normal game state, it is possible to prevent both the game round related to the first special information and the game round related to the second special game state from repeating start/end. This is configured to display information corresponding to the number of times the game has been played in the second normal game state (for example, the number of times of execution and the number of times remaining until reaching the reference number of times), and the display update speed is changed to the second normal game state. This is preferable in order to prevent the state from becoming too fast at the beginning of the state.

Feature G8. As the special game state, a first special game state (for example, opening and closing execution mode compatible with 16R) and a second special game state (for example, a second special game state in which the special ball entering section has less chance of switching to the receiving state than the first special game state ( For example, opening and closing execution mode corresponding to 6R) is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein in the first lottery process by the first lottery means, a lottery result corresponding to the second special game state is more likely to be obtained than the first special game state. .

As shown in the feature G8, when the state shifts from the first normal game state to the special game state to the special game state, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first flow path to the second flow path. In this special game state, for example, since the second special game state with a small number of times of opening (the number of rounds) is likely to be selected, the number of second special information stored until the transition to the second normal game state is minimized. can do.

Feature G9. A plurality of pattern variable display periods are provided by the second game time control means, and when the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is less than a predetermined number, the variable A predetermined variable display period is set as the display period,
The sum of the predetermined variable display period and the fixed display period of the pattern by the second game round control means is stored in the first acquired information storage means by the first game round control means along with the transition to the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or feature G8, characterized in that it is set to be longer than the total period of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the upper limit number of games are played.

According to the feature G9, when the number of second special information stored when shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state is less than a predetermined number, a predetermined variable display is performed as a variable display period. A period is set. During this predetermined variable display period, all game rounds related to the first special information are executed. With such a configuration, when the second normal game state is started, it is possible to suitably suppress the repetition of the start/end of both the game round related to the first special information and the game round related to the second special game state. . This is preferable for exhibiting the effects shown in feature G7 and the like.

Feature G10. The second start-up ball entry section can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a non-receiving state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the acceptance state,
Switching means for switching the second start-up ball entry unit between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state (function for executing opening and closing processing of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) ,
As a switching control mode of the second starting ball-entering unit by the second starting ball-entering unit switching means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second starting ball-entering unit rather than the first switching mode are selected. is provided with a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period in which the is in the non-accepting state is short,
In the second normal game state, the second switching mode is set as the switching control mode,
In the second normal game state, the second game cycle control means reduces the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, thereby changing the pattern on the second display section. It is configured so that the display period is short,
In the second normal game state, the first game time control means sets the variable display period of the pattern on the first display section regardless of the number of the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G9, characterized in that the period is constant and shorter than the first normal gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal game state, the switching control mode of the second starting ball entering section becomes the second switching mode, thereby increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entering section. As a result, in each game round related to the second starting ball entry section, the same or similar variable display period is set as the pattern variable display period, and the game round progresses at a constant rhythm and good tempo. Become.

Here, if the first special information remains at the time of transition to the second normal game state, the game rounds related to the first special information have the same variable display period. The game times are also digested at a good tempo. As a result, the effects shown in feature 7 and the like can be exhibited more favorably.

Feature G11. In the second normal game state, the pattern variable display period set by the first game round control means is configured to be shorter than the pattern variable display period set by the second game round control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G10, characterized in that

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal game state, the game rounds related to the special 1 special information are quickly consumed. Become. As a result, it is possible to minimize the reference number of times set as the condition for transition to the third normal game state, which contributes to an improvement in the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times.

Feature G12. In the second normal game state, the pattern fixed display period set by the first game round control means is configured to be shorter than the pattern fixed display period set by the second game round control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G11, characterized in that

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal game state, the game rounds related to the special 1 special information are quickly consumed. Become. As a result, it is possible to minimize the reference number of times set as the condition for transition to the third normal game state, which contributes to an improvement in the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features G2 to G12 to feature G1.

Also, the technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G12 may be applied to the above features A to F.

<Characteristic group H>
The following feature group H is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball to the game area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (see, for example, Patent Document 1). It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature H1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
It is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. a starting ball entry portion (right side operation ball entry portion 63);
ball entry detection means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball entering the starting ball entry portion;
Effective period setting means for setting the effective period of ball entry into the starting ball-entering section when the starting ball-entering section switches from the second state to the first state (effective period is set by MPU 602 of main controller 162) function to set) and
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a game ball is detected by the ball entry detection means during the effective period function to pay out prize balls) and
A passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area and through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass;
Predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (power reserve) based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion (function for acquiring power reserve by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162);
provided with predetermined information storage means (electrical storage area 633 in RAM 604 of main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
A lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that performs a winner lottery based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means;
a pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display portion (through-gate display portion DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Before the lottery is performed by the lottery means or based on the lottery being performed by the lottery means, the pattern is variably displayed on the display unit, and after the variable display, the result of the lottery corresponds to the result of the lottery. Display control means (for example, a function of executing display control of the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for confirming and displaying the drawn pattern;
When the lottery by the lottery means results in a winning result, the starting ball entering section is switched from the second state to the first state, and under the first state, a predetermined condition (for example, opening time ) is established, switching control means for switching the starting ball entry portion from the first state to the second state (a function of executing opening and closing control of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162); with
The valid period setting means sets the valid period so that the valid period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.7 sec) even after the starting ball-entering section is switched from the first state to the second state. It is configured to
The display control means, if the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball-entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, displays the display before the valid period elapses. and variable display starting means for starting variable display of the pattern on the display unit (function for starting variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162). Characteristic game machine.

According to feature H1, when the starting ball-entering portion switches from the first state to the second state, the effective period continues for a predetermined period even after switching to the second state. As a result, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the starting ball entering section at the same time as switching to the second state can also be subject to privilege provision. This is preferable in terms of avoiding a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as being unable to obtain benefits that should be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entering section switches to the second state, the variable display of the pattern on the display section starts without waiting for the expiration of the valid period. be done. In this way, if the variable display of the pattern is started during the effective period and the effective period and the variable display period are at least partially overlapped, the starting ball entrance section is changed from the first state to the second state to the first state. It is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the variable display period of the pattern, etc., when switching to the state and rapidly progressing the game. This is preferable in terms of improving the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball-entering section is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means shown in the present feature, Regarding the variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display section before the valid period elapses, "the display control means controls the starting ball entry section from the first state to the second state." variable display start means for starting variable display of the pattern on the display unit before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when switching to . is also possible.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
It is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. a starting ball entry portion (right side operation ball entry portion 63);
ball entry detection means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball entering the starting ball entry portion;
Effective period setting means for setting the effective period of ball entry into the starting ball-entering section when the starting ball-entering section switches from the second state to the first state (effective period is set by MPU 602 of main controller 162) function to set) and
Special information acquisition means (function for acquiring hold information by MPU 602 of main controller 162) for acquiring special information when a ball is detected by said ball entry detection means during said effective period;
A first lottery means (a function of executing lotteries for big wins and special wins in the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that performs a lottery based on the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when the lottery by the first lottery means results in a winning result (MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 switches to the opening and closing execution mode. function to execute the migration process) and
A passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the game area and through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass;
Predetermined information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (power reserve) based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion (function for acquiring power reserve by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162);
predetermined information storage means (electrical storage area 633 in RAM 604 of main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a support lottery by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162) that performs a winner lottery based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means;
a pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display portion (through-gate display portion DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the lottery being conducted by the second lottery means or based on the fact that the lottery is conducted by the second lottery means, the pattern display means starts variable display of patterns, and the result of the lottery is displayed. Display control means (for example, a function of executing display control of the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for confirming and displaying the corresponding pattern;
When a winning result is obtained in the lottery by the second lottery means, the starting ball-entering section is switched from the second state to the first state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied under the first state. Switching control means for switching the starting ball entry portion from the first state to the second state when the
The effective period setting means is configured to set the effective period so that the effective period continues for a predetermined period even after the starting ball-entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state. ,
If the predetermined information is stored when the starting ball-entering section is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means displays a display on the display section before the valid period elapses. A game machine characterized by comprising variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern (function for starting the variable display of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162).

According to feature H2, when the starting ball-entering portion switches from the first state to the second state, the effective period continues for a predetermined period even after switching to the second state. As a result, for example, the game ball that has flowed into the starting ball entering section at the same time as switching to the second state can also be subject to privilege provision. This is preferable in terms of avoiding a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play, such as being unable to obtain benefits that should be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entering section switches to the second state, the variable display of the pattern on the display section starts without waiting for the expiration of the valid period. be done. In this way, if the variable display of the pattern is started during the effective period and the effective period and the variable display period are at least partially overlapped, the starting ball entrance section is changed from the first state to the second state to the first state. It is possible to suppress extremely shortening of the variable display period of the pattern, etc., when switching to the state and rapidly progressing the game. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball-entering section is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means shown in the present feature, Regarding the variable display starting means for starting the variable display of the pattern on the display section before the valid period elapses, "the display control means controls the starting ball entry section from the first state to the second state." variable display starting means for starting variable display of the pattern on the display unit before the predetermined period elapses when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when switching to is also possible.

Feature H3. A ball passage that guides a game ball that has passed through the entrance portion (right operation port 63a) of the starting ball entry portion to a detection area (detection area DE) by the ball entry detection means,
Characteristic feature H1 or characteristic feature H2, characterized in that the predetermined period is a period determined based on a period required for the game ball to move from the entrance portion to the detection area (detection area DE). game machine.

As shown in feature H3, by setting the predetermined period based on the period required for the game ball to move from the entrance portion of the starting ball entrance portion to the detection area, the predetermined period is set to secure the profit of the player. It is possible to prevent the (effective period) from becoming excessively long. This is a preferable configuration in terms of suppressing cheating related to the start-up ball club while securing profits shown in feature H1 and the like.

Feature H4. Said variable display starting means, when said predetermined information is not stored in said predetermined information storage means before said starting ball entering portion is switched from said first state to said second state, and during said predetermined period of time The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein when the predetermined information is newly acquired, the variable display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period.

In the configuration in which the predetermined information is acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, the predetermined information is not necessarily acquired and stored before the starting ball-entering portion switches from the first state to the second state. , the predetermined information may be acquired after switching to the second state. Therefore, when the predetermined information is newly acquired during the predetermined period, the variable display of the pattern is started during the predetermined period. It can contribute to the smooth progress of the game compared to .

Feature H5. The variable display starting means, if the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, before the valid period elapses according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that the variable display of the pattern is started at the timing of switching the starting ball-entering unit from the second state to the first state. game machine.

As shown in feature H5, when the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball-entering section is switched to the first state, the variable display of the pattern starts at the timing when the starting ball-entering section is switched to the first state. It will be done. By effectively utilizing the predetermined period in this way, it is possible to exhibit the effect of rapidly executing the next switching to the second state while ensuring the variable display period of the pattern.

Feature H6. The display control means includes a variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture on the display section (a function of setting the variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162). have
As the switching control mode of the starting entrance section by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) and
Characteristic feature H5, characterized in that when the second switching mode is set, the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is shorter than the predetermined period. game machine.

As shown in feature H6, in the second switching mode in which the frequency of entering the starting ball entering portion is high, by setting the variable display period to be shorter than the predetermined period and starting the fixed display of the pattern during the predetermined period. , the following effects can be expected. That is, with a configuration in which the starting ball entering section is switched to the first state after the variable display of the pattern on the display section → the fixed display, it is possible to start the fixed display before the end of the predetermined period (effective period). It is possible to shorten the period until the ball-entering portion is switched to the first state again.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "when the display control means starts the variable display part of the pattern on the display part before the predetermined period elapses, and the variable display period elapses during the predetermined period. In this case, the game machine according to feature H5 is configured to start the fixed display of the pattern on the display unit during the predetermined period."

Feature H7. The display control means includes fixed display period setting means for setting the fixed display period of the pattern on the display section (the function of setting the fixed display time of the pattern on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162). have
The variable display starting means, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball-entering part is switched from the first state to the second state, the starting ball-entering part is At the timing when the second state is switched to the first state, the display unit starts to display the pattern in a variable manner,
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein in the second switching mode, the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is defined to match the predetermined period.

According to the feature H7, since the confirmation display can be terminated at the timing when the validity period has passed, when the lottery related to the predetermined information is won, the start-up ball entrance section is quickly moved to the second position as the validity period passes. It is possible to switch to state 1. As a result, the effects shown in the feature H1 and the like can be favorably exhibited.

Feature H8. The display control means includes a variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture on the display section (a function of setting the variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162). have
As the switching control mode of the starting entrance section by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) and
Characteristic H1 to Characteristic H7 characterized in that when the first switching mode is set, the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is longer than or equal to the predetermined period. The game machine according to any one of.

In the first switching mode, the frequency of ball entry into the starting ball entering portion is lower than in the second switching mode. In such a state, by setting the variable display period to a predetermined period or longer, it is possible to lengthen the interval period when the starting ball-entering portion is continuously switched to the first state. This is preferable for differentiating between the first switching mode and the second switching mode.

Feature H9. provided with predetermined information storage means (electrical storage area 633 in RAM 604 of main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
The display control means includes variable display period setting means for setting the variable display period of the picture on the display section (a function of setting the variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162). , fixed display period setting means for setting the fixed display period of the pattern in the display section (function of setting the fixed display time of the pattern in the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162),
has
The variable display starting means, if the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering portion is switched from the first state to the second state, before the valid period elapses and at the timing when the starting ball-entering portion is switched from the second state to the first state, the variable display of the pattern is started,
The starting ball entry portion has an inlet portion (right operating port 63a) that opens upward and a shutter (shutter 331) that covers the inlet portion. is in the second state, the shutter forms the bottom surface of a ball passage that traverses above the inlet portion, and the shutter is displaced from the closed position to the open position to the first state. By doing so, the game ball on the shutter is configured to fall to the entrance portion,
As the switching control mode of the starting entrance section by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) and
In the first switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set such that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is longer than the predetermined period,
In the second switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set so that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period has the same length as the predetermined period,
The time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period in the first switching mode, and is equal to the variable display period in the second switching mode and the The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the sum of the fixed display period.

In the configuration shown in feature H9, the game ball launched to the starting ball entering portion enters the starting ball entering portion by moving the shutter from the closed position to the open position. In the configuration in which the shutter forms the bottom (rolling surface) of the ball passage, the game ball positioned on the shutter falls to the starting ball entry portion (entrance portion) as the shutter moves to the open position. Here, the period for which the shutter is maintained at the closed position is longer or shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter, thereby providing a difference in the frequency of entering the ball, and switching between the first switching mode and the second switching mode. It is possible to achieve differentiation from Here, it is necessary to secure a variable display period and a fixed display period to some extent in order to visually confirm the pattern. It can be a big constraint in making a difference. In this regard, if the technical idea shown in feature H1 is applied to the configuration shown in this feature, the progress speed of the game is changed in order to diversify the game. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in features H1 to H9 may be applied to the features A to G described above.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 41) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 110) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (such as a nail) arranged in the game area. A game machine that provides a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general prize winning port 61, etc.).

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41... Game ball shooting handle, 60... Game board, 62... Lower operation ball entry portion, 62a... Lower operation opening, 63... Right operation ball entry portion, 63a... Right operation opening, 64 Upper variable winning device 65 Lower variable winning device 70 Ball entering unit 75 Symbol display device 75a Display screen 81 Main display unit 110 Game ball shooting mechanism as game ball shooting means , 162... main control device 191... power source/emission control device 311... upper grand prize opening 315... shutter 323... intermediate passage portion 331... shutter 335a, 336a... rib portion 345... shutter 602... MPU, 604...RAM, 632...holding ball storage area, D...main display section, DL...display section for lower opening, DR...display section for right opening, DS...display section for through gate, PE...game area, SE1... First specific area, SE2... Second specific area.

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball is entered into the starting ball entry section provided in the game area;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the obtained information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
a pattern display means having a display portion and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display portion;
Prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination by the determination means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. The pattern is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one game cycle, and the pattern is displayed in a variable manner in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. game turn control means for controlling the display means;
The determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the pattern corresponding to the determination result is stop-displayed by the game cycle control means. a special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state advantageous to
As the normal game state, a first normal game state, a second normal game state more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, and a third normal game state more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state A game state is provided,
When the determination result by the determination means in the first normal game state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, from the first normal game state to the second normal game state through the special game state a first transfer means for transferring;
A second transition means for directly transitioning from the second normal game state to the third normal game state,
The game round control means has variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern,
The variable display period setting means has a period shortening means for shortening the variable display period of the patterns in the third normal game state to a period shorter than the variable display period of the patterns in the second normal game state. game machine.

Images